You are on page 1of 235

Ring Car Board II With OCSS

Feature Setup Document

Preliminary - AAA30005AAI

March 11, 2024

Otis document configuration number 51395

NONDISCLOSURE WARNING

This work contains proprietary information and is the property of Otis Elevator Company. It is
distributed only to those employees with a need to know the information and it may not be reproduced,
disclosed, or distributed to any person outside the employ of Otis Elevator Company without written
authorization from an officer thereof. Otis competitors, customers, former employees, retirees, members
of the general public and consultants not bound by a written nondisclosure agreement are among those
outside the employ of Otis. In the event that an employee in the possession of this work no longer needs
the information, retires, resigns is terminated or laid off from Otis, or in the event that a person outside
the employ of Otis comes into possession of this work, such employee or person should destroy the work
or return it to Otis.
Any unauthorized reproduction, disclosure, or distribution by any person of any portion of this work may
be a breach of duty owed by such person to Otis Elevator Company and could result in damages
actionable at law.
PROHIBITION ON COPYING
Any unauthorized reproduction, disclosure, or distribution of copies by any person of any portion of this
work may be a violation of Copyright Laws of the United States of America and other countries, could
result in the awarding of Statutory Damages of up to $100,000 (17 USC 504) for infringement and may
result in further civil and criminal penalties. All rights reserved.

Unpublished work - ã Otis Elevator Company 1995


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 2 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 3 of 235

Revision History

SCR Date Author Description


30005-15 02/02/94 J. Stone Added Chapter for Door Lock Failure operation.
30005-224 02/14/94 D. Hughes Added Chapter for E335M System Setup. Added FSIIHC signal to
available signal lamps.
30005-242 02/18/94 J. Stone Added EQOTYP parameter to EQO setup.
02/21/94 D. Hughes Corrected wiring illustration/explanation for Emergency Power
Split Feeder Operation.
30005-253 02/25/94 J. Collins Added MIT-CK parameter to the uppeak activation section.
30005-230 03/30/94 J. Collins Added installation parameter groups instead of installation
parameter numbers to support the new service tool format.
30005-281 03/30/94 J. Collins Removed the door information from CTL-P and added the CTL-O
bit mask parameter.
30005-282 03/30/94 J. Collins Added the HBP-P and HBP-O parameters for Hall Button
Protection instead of using the CTL parameters.
30005-278 03/30/94 J. Collins Removed the CONFIG parameter. Added the EN-MOD
parameter and the SVT-P parameter.
04/13/94 J. Stone Added the REFK switch logic table to the PhaseI chapter.
04/13/94 J. Stone Added allowed mask to Inverted Rise chapter.
04/19/94 J. Stone Updated the ELD feature description.
30005-5 05/05/94 J. Collins Added hall lantern combinations using HL-SET equal to 8. 9, and
10.
30005-30 05/09/94 J. Stone Updated Independent Service with ISC-O parameter and removed
ISSINC and ISSINH parameters.
30005-27 05/10/94 J. Collins Added Split Group Operation. Moved the EN-SHB and SCOTYP
parameters to the Dispatching group.
30005-32 05/11/94 J. Stone Added Vacuum Flourescent Speech Board.
30005-26 05/12/94 J. Stone Added DHB-O parameter to DHB mode.
30005-29 05/16/94 J. Stone Added Fire Proof Doors (FPD).
30005-277 05/23/94 J. Collins Added SAB bit to Special Masks. Modified Special Mask
descriptions to be a single character.
30005-28 05/24/94 D. Hughes Added Discrete-Based Emergency Power Operation.
30005-25 05/26/94 J. Stone Updated the DTO/DTC descriptions.
30005-228 05/27/94 J. Stone Updated FSKTYP definition.
30005-56 05/27/94 J. Collins Added Remote Elevator Monitoring (REM) chapter.
30005-25 06/10/94 J. Stone Remove manual door specifics from E335MW setup.
30005-33 06/13/94 J. Stone Updated SES PhaseI and PhaseII.
30005-59 06/13/94 J. Stone Updated SES for British Standard. Only chosen cars can
automatically enter PhaseII operation.
30005-86 08/08/94 J. Stone Updated SES for ESB overrides.
30005-93 08/12/94 J. Stone Updated Emergency Stop Button.
30005-67 08/15/94 J. Stone Updated the Car Call to Terminal and Disable Door chapters.
30005-35 08/15/94 J. Collins Added many modifications for MIT and CHN.
30005-77 08/19/94 J. Stone Added security options.
30005-78
30005-239
30005-79 08/23/94 J. Stone Updated EMS security to have ISC override option.
30005-259 08/23/94 J. Collins Added GFSL0-GFSL9 outputs.
30005-9 08/24/94 J. Collins Replaced MIN-C and MAX-C with CC-DT. Replaced MIN-H and
MAX-H with HC-DT.
30005-90 08/25/94 J. Collins Renamed SST-T to SST-DT. Added REV-DT to specify reversal
door dwell time.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 4 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

30005-101 08/25/94 J. Stone Chnaged comment for British Standard fire code.
30005-83 08/25/94 J. Stone Added Car Failed to Start signal tests.
30005-91 08/26/94 J. Stone Added EHS selectable time.
30005-222 09/01/94 J. Collins Converted EN-SHB to a bit mask and added the “L” bit to
enable/disable lanterns during separate riser operation.
30005-214 09/02/94 J. Collins Added CPC-O to select either the link for the CPCs.
30005-81 09/12/94 J. Stone Updated SES feature setup.
30005-82 09/27/94 J. Collins Added the ability to specify different PI types for each of the
serial links.
30005-106 09/27/94 J. Collins Added Dot Matrix Pis.
30005-81 09/27/94 J. Stone Added SESPRO to SES PhaseII setup.
30005-80 09/30/94 D. Hughes Added Emergency Power Operation: Rescue Operation Setup
chapter
30005-111 10/01/94 J. Collins Re-added the FSR output (#2494). Added GFSL1 (#2564)
through GFSL60 (#2623).
30005-117 10/13/94 J. Stone Add DDSR2 relay for Taiwan
10/14/94 J. Stone Updated ELD with new version of ELD Setup Guide.
30005-114 10/14/94 J. Stone Update CRO operation.
30005-119 10/17/94 J. Collins Added the SYNCH. CLOCKS command to the service tool (Menu
1,7,3).
30005-128 10/19/94 J. Collins Replaced the LWTYPE and MC-ICD parameters with the MCSS-
O parameter.
30005-132 10/28/94 J. Stone Generic security override by ISC is now global instead of element
based.
30005-136 11/10/94 J. Stone Update SES setup.
30005-137
30005-147 12/02/94 D. Hughes Removed “D” bit in EPO-O parameter and replaced with
mandatory addressing of discrete relays for discrete-based EPO.
30005-159 12/16/94 J. Stone Rename EN-MOD to EN-EMO.
30005-160 12/16/94 J. Stone Remove P bit from ISC-O parameter.
30005-162 12/19/94 J. Stone Add comments to the ISC setup.
30005-178 12/25/94 J. Collins Added GNGDLY to specify activation/deactivation delay for
down hall lanterns using HL-SET=3, 4, 6, 8, or 9.
30005-177 12/25/94 J. Collins Deactivate MIT Next Selected Car lantern at lobby if both the “F”
and “f” bits of MIT-O are zero.
02/06/95 D. Hughes Corrected description of AEPS output
02/10/95 D. Hughes Renamed LFC (#434) to LFCC and LR (#2492) to LFCG.
30005-191 02/10/95 J. Collins Renamed EN-MT5 to EMS-O.
30005- 02/15/95 D. Hughes Updated description for discrete-based EPO.
30005-205 02/21/95 J. Collins Grouped EZ parameters under the Rise Group.
03/07/95 J. Stone Add to Singapore SES setup.
30005-284 03/08/95 J. Collins Modified SRO to disable rear car calls with allowed masks.
30005-312 03/27/95 J. Stone Add Chicago-94 SES

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 5 of 235

Table of Contents:
Introduction:.................................................................................................................................
RSL & Installation Parameter Description....................................................................................
Service Tool Menus......................................................................................................................
ADA Door Dwell..........................................................................................................................
ADA Emergency Communications...............................................................................................
Anti-Crime Protection Operation (ACP).......................................................................................
Anti-Nuisance Operation (ANS)...................................................................................................
Attendant Operation (ATT)...........................................................................................................
Available Signal Lamps................................................................................................................
Cafeteria Position (CFT)...............................................................................................................
Call Generation, Random..............................................................................................................
Cancel Door Dwell Time..............................................................................................................
Car Call Card Reader, car link (CRC)...........................................................................................
Car Call Card Reader, hall link (CRH)..........................................................................................
Car Call Cutoff.............................................................................................................................
Car Calls Behind..........................................................................................................................
Car Calls to Terminal Landings....................................................................................................
Card Reader Lock down (CRL)....................................................................................................
Card Reader Operation (CRO)......................................................................................................
Car Failed To Start (CFTS)...........................................................................................................
Car Position Contacts (CPC).........................................................................................................
Car Secure Access........................................................................................................................
Car to Landing Operation.............................................................................................................
Channeling (CHN)........................................................................................................................
Contract Enabling.........................................................................................................................
Correction Operation (COR).........................................................................................................
Crowd Sensing..............................................................................................................................
Delayed Car Protection Operation (DCP)......................................................................................
Disable Doors Feature...................................................................................................................
Dispatching..................................................................................................................................
Distress Signal..............................................................................................................................
Door Configuration: Front............................................................................................................
Door Configuration: Rear.............................................................................................................
Door Hold Button Operation (DHB).............................................................................................
Door Lock Failure Operation (DLF).............................................................................................
Door Time Close Operation (DTC)...............................................................................................
Door Time Monitoring (PMO)......................................................................................................
Door Time Open Operation (DTO)...............................................................................................
Door Dwell Times........................................................................................................................
Double Riser of Hall Buttons........................................................................................................
Drive Brake Failure Operation (DBF)...........................................................................................
Drives: Direct Drives....................................................................................................................
Drives: Group Successive Starting (GSS)......................................................................................
Drives: Velocity Profiles...............................................................................................................
E335M System Setup....................................................................................................................
Earthquake Operation (EQO)........................................................................................................
Electroluminescent Display (ELD)...............................................................................................
ELD Interface Board LED Definitions..........................................................................................
Emergency Medical Operation (EMT)..........................................................................................
Emergency Medical Car Operation (EMK)...................................................................................
Emergency Power Operation: Automatic......................................................................................
Emergency Power Operation: Automatic Transfer To/From Standby Power.................................
Emergency Power Operation: Discrete-Based...............................................................................
Emergency Power Operation: Intergroup......................................................................................

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 6 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

Emergency Power Operation: Rescue Operation...........................................................................


Emergency Power Operation: Split Feeder....................................................................................
Emergency Power Operation: Transfer to Normal.........................................................................
Emergency Service Protection Operation (EFP)............................................................................
Emergency Stop Operation (ESB).................................................................................................
EMS Related Features..................................................................................................................
Express Zones...............................................................................................................................
Field Engineering Spares..............................................................................................................
Fire Proof Doors (FPD).................................................................................................................
Fire Service Operation, PhaseI (EFO)...........................................................................................
Fire Service Operation, PhaseII (EFS)...........................................................................................
Flicker Signals Feature.................................................................................................................
Generic Security...........................................................................................................................
Hall Button Protection Operation (HBP).......................................................................................
Hall Call Card Reader (HCR).......................................................................................................
Hall Call Cutoff............................................................................................................................
Hall Call Cutoff Operation (CHC)................................................................................................
Independent Service Operation (ISC)............................................................................................
Inverted Rise................................................................................................................................
Landing Passing Tone (LPT)........................................................................................................
Lanterns and Gongs......................................................................................................................
Late Push Door Reversal...............................................................................................................
Light and Fan switch-off...............................................................................................................
Limited Door Reversal (LDR)......................................................................................................
Load Non-Stop Operation (LNS)..................................................................................................
MCSS Offset table........................................................................................................................
Moderate Incoming Traffic (MIT)................................................................................................
Moderate Outgoing Traffic (MOT)...............................................................................................
Modernization Setup.....................................................................................................................
Non-Selective Door Operation......................................................................................................
Normal Operation (NOR).............................................................................................................
Not Available Operation (NAV)...................................................................................................
Nudging (NDG)............................................................................................................................
Odd Travel...................................................................................................................................
OtisCheck Signals.........................................................................................................................
Overload Operation (OLD)...........................................................................................................
Park and Shutdown Operation (PKS)............................................................................................
Parking Operation (PRK): general description..............................................................................
Parking: Automatic Car Return (ARD).........................................................................................
Parking: Cyclic Test.....................................................................................................................
Parking: Delay Feature.................................................................................................................
Parking: Door Open Feature.........................................................................................................
Parking: Dynamic zone.................................................................................................................
Parking: Excluded Landing Feature..............................................................................................
Parking: Fixed zone......................................................................................................................
Parking: Simplex..........................................................................................................................
Position Indicators........................................................................................................................
Priority Service Operation (EHS, EPS, PPA)................................................................................
Remote Elevator Monitoring (REM).............................................................................................
Ring Communications: Adjustable Baud Rate...............................................................................
Ring Communications: Contractible bits.......................................................................................
Riot Operation (ROT)...................................................................................................................
Sabbath Operation (SAB).............................................................................................................
Security Options...........................................................................................................................
Selectable Advanced Car Assignment (SACA).............................................................................

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 7 of 235

Separate Hall Button Riser (SRO).................................................................................................


Shuttle Car Operation...................................................................................................................
Speech Synthesis..........................................................................................................................
Split Group Operation...................................................................................................................
Stuck Button.................................................................................................................................
Swing Car Operation....................................................................................................................
Transfer Floor Service (TFS)........................................................................................................
Vacuum Flourescent Speech Board (VFSB)..................................................................................
Wild Car Operation (WCO)..........................................................................................................

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 8 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

Introduction:
This document has been created to aid in setting up the Operational Control Sub-System software. Each
feature description contains the following information:
· Feature Description. This description is usually derived from the product Terms of Reference
document.
· Inputs and Outputs. This subsection describes the I/O required for contracting this feature.
Listed is the I/O's acronym, number, serial link, description, and active state.
· Installation Parameters. This subsection describes the installation parameters required for
contracting this feature. Listed is the installation parameters acronym, location, description, and
disabling value.
· Setup. Describes in more detail how each feature can be configured.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 9 of 235

RSL & Installation Parameter Description


Feature Description
This chapter describes the following:
· how to read the inputs and outputs table
· how to read the installation parameters table
· how to change an input or output
· how to change an installation parameter

Inputs and Outputs


Name I/O# I/O Link Description Active
ESH 324 Input Car Fireman's switch, HOLD position H
FSR 2494 Output Group Fire Service Lamp, Group Link -
EQS 1293 Input Hall Earthquake sensor L

Installation Parameters
Name Group Description Disable
ASL2-P 6 Fire service second alternate recall landing 255
FSKTYP 6 Fire service switch types N/A

Setup
Inputs and Outputs Table
The six columns of the inputs and outputs table are defined as follows:
· Name: The associated acronym
· #: The location in the EEprom
· I/O: Input or Output
· Link: Car, Hall or Group
· Description: The description of the I/O
· Active: The active state of the input: Without voltage or Low(L), and with voltage or
High(H). All outputs have a dash ('-') to signify the output is activated by introducing a
ground.
The above example gives the following information:
· The input ESH is located on the car link at 324. The input is for the HOLD position of the
fireman's switch and is active when the input has voltage, active high.
· The output FSR is located on the group link at 2494. The output is the group fire service
lamp and is activated by introducing a ground.
· The input EQS is located on the hall link at 1293. The input is for the earthquake sensor
and is active when the input has no voltage, active low.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 10 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

Installation Parameters Table


The four columns of the installation parameters table are define as follows:
· Name: The associated acronym
· Group: The installation parameter group in which the parameter belongs. The following
groups have been defined:
1) General OCSS
2) Rise
3) Car Features
4) Group Features
5) Dispatching
6) Emergency
7) Security
8) Signal Devices
9) Motion

· Description: The description of the installation parameter


· Disable: The value which disables the parameter's function. If the function can not be
disabled using the parameter, N/A appears.
The example on the previous page gives the following information:
· The ASL2-P parameter belongs to Group #6 (Emergency). The parameter defines the
second alternate recall landing and is disabled when equal to 255.
· The FSKTYP parameter also belongs to Group #6 (Emergency). The parameter defines the
fire switch types and can not be used to disable any function.
Input and Output Setup
The interface to the inputs and outputs is the Remote Serial Link (RSL). Three channels are supported,
the car link, the hall link, and the group link. Each I/O is associated to a specific link and are assigned
specific locations in the EEprom. By using the service tool, the address of any I/O can be changed.
To assign an I/O to a specific address, the # of the I/O, and the address to be assigned to the I/O. are
needed. The following procedure allows an I/O to be changed:
1. The key sequence M, 1, 3, 2 places the service tool into the I/O setup screen.
2. Enter the number of the I/O desired, then press Enter.
3. The current value is displayed, and the cursor is placed at the new value location.
4. Enter the new address and pin number, then press Enter. The value entered now appears in
the old value location.
Installation Parameter Setup
The installation parameters are used to enable, disable, or alter functionality of certain software features.
The parameters are located at a specific location in the EEprom. By using the service tool, the value of
any installation parameter can be changed.
The following procedure allows an installation parameter to be updated with a new value:
1. The key sequence M, 1, 3, 1 places the service tool into the installation parameter select
group screen. In this screen, the user chooses one of the installation parameter groups (1-9).
2. Once a group has been chosen, the first installation parameter for that group is displayed.
2. The Goon/Goback keys move to the next/previous parameter in the group. The Up/Down
keys move forward/back ten parameters at a time within the group. With this in mind, use
the Goon/Goback and Up/Down keys to move to the desired parameter.
3. Enter the new value, then press Enter. The entered value is then displayed at the 'old' value
location.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 11 of 235

Service Tool Menus


M,1,1: MONITOR
M,1,1,1: CAR MONITOR
M,1,1,2: I/O MONITOR
M,1,1,3: GROUP MONITOR
M,1,1,4: ICSS MONITOR
M,1,1,5: TASK MONITOR
M,1,1,6: RAM MONITOR

M,1,2: TEST
M,1,2,1: RSL I/O
M,1,2,1,1: CAR RSL I/O
M,1,2,1,2: HALL RSL I/O
M,1,2,1,3: GROUP RSL I/O
M,1,2,2: LOGS
M,1,2,2,1: EVENT LOG
M,1,2,2,2: OPMODE LOG
M,1,2,2,3: CPU LOG
M,1,2,2,4: RING LOG
M,1,2,2,5: CALL LOG
M,1,2,3: SELF TESTS
M,1,2,3,1: RUN SELF TESTS
M,1,2,3,2: CAR RESULTS
M,1,2,3,3: HALL RESULTS
M,1,2,3,4: GROUP RESULTS
M,1,2,4: PART NUMBERS

M,1,3: GENERAL SETUP


M,1,3,1: INSTALL PARAMS
M,1,3,1,1: GENERAL OCSS
M,1,3,1,2: RISE
M,1,3,1,3: CAR FEATURES
M,1,3,1,4: GROUP FEATURES
M,1,3,1,5: DISPATCHING
M,1,3,1,6: EMERGENCY
M,1,3,1,7: SECURITY
M,1,3,1,8: SIGNAL DEVICES
M,1,3,1,9: MOTION
M,1,3,2: INPUTS/OUTPUTS
M,1,3,3: MASKS
M,1,3,3,1: ALLOWED MASKS
M,1,3,3,2: SPECIAL MASKS
M,1,3,3,3: GFSC MASKS
M,1,3,3,4: SCO MASKS
M,1,3,4: POS INDICATORS
M,1,3,5: FLOOR TABLE
M,1,3,6: EMS CONT BITS

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 12 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

M,1,4: SPECIAL SETUP


M,1,4,1: POS SPEECH
M,1,4,2: SPECIAL SPEECH
M,1,4,3: GENERIC SEC.
M,1,4,4: OPMODE ENABLE
M,1,4,5: SHUTTLE CAR

M,1,5: CLEAR
M,1,5,1: CLEAR PF RAM
M,1,5,2: CLEAR SAC RAM

M,1,6: MEMORY MAP


M,1,6,1: TASKS
M,1,6,2: OPMODES

M,1,7: CLOCK
M,1,7,1: DISPLAY TIME
M,1,7,2: SETUP TIME
M,1,7,3: SYNCH. CLOCKS

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 13 of 235

ADA Door Dwell


Feature Description
The Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) requires a minimum acceptable time from notification that a
car is answering a hall call until the doors of that car start to close.

Inputs and Outputs


None.

Installation Parameters
Name Group Description Disable
ADA-T 3 ADA lantern dwell time 0

Setup
The ADA-T parameter is used to enable the ADA Door Dwell feature. This parameter holds the
minimum acceptable time from notification that the car is answering a hall call until the doors of that car
start to close.
The following formula should be used to calculate the ADA-T value for each car in the group:
ADA-T = Distance (ft) / (1.5 ft/s)
or
ADA-T = Distance (mm) / (445 mm/s)
where "ADA-T" is the total time in seconds and "Distance" is the distance (in feet or millimeters) from a
point in the lobby or corridor 60 inches (1525 mm) directly in front of the farthest hall call button
controlling that car to the centerline of its hoist way door.
The minimum acceptable notification time is 5 seconds.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 14 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

ADA Emergency Communications


Feature Description
The Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) requires a communication system which enables
communication with a guard station from within the elevator cab. The basic operation is as follows:
· The alarm button located in the cab is pressed illuminating the alarm button lamp in the cab and
the lobby panel distress lamp, and activating the lobby panel distress buzzer.
· The alarm is acknowledged at the lobby panel, illuminating the acknowledged lamp in the cab to
inform the passenger that help is on the way. The lobby panel distress buzzer is deactivated.
· The alarm is reset at the lobby panel after the problem has been resolved. Upon reset, the
acknowledged lamp and the distress lamp are turned off.
· The operation sequence restarts whenever the alarm button is pressed.

Inputs and Outputs


Name I/O# I/O Link Description Active
ALBI 454 Input Car Alarm Button H
ALBO 455 Output Car Alarm Button Lamp -
AAL 456 Output Car Alarm Acknowledged Lamp -
AACK 1386 Input Hall Alarm Acknowledged H
DRES 1387 Input Hall Alarm Reset H
DISB 1388 Output Hall Alarm Distress Buzzer -
DISL 1389 Output Hall Alarm Distress Lamp -

Installation Parameters
None.

Setup
Addressing all the I/Os is the only setup required.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 15 of 235

Anti-Crime Protection Operation (ACP)


Feature Description
Anti-crime protection forces each car to stop at a pre-defined landing and open it's doors. This allows a
security guard or receptionist at the pre-defined landing to visually inspect the passengers. The car stops
at this landing as it passes to answer demand.

Inputs and Outputs


Name I/O# I/O Link Description Active
ACSC 415 Input Car Anti-crime protection switch H
ACSH 1285 Input Hall Anti-crime protection switch H

Installation Parameters
Name Group Description Disable
IST-P 7 Intermediate stopping position 255

Setup
The IST-P parameter needs to be set to a valid building landing and at least one of the inputs needs to
addressed.
The IST-P parameter can have the following values:
· 1 to 64 = landing 1 to 64, car stops in both directions
· 101 to 164 = landing 1 to 64, car stops in up direction only
· 201 to 254 = landing 1 to 54, car stops in down direction only
· 255 = disables

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 16 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

Anti-Nuisance Operation (ANS)


Feature Description
Upon activation, all registered car calls are canceled. This is used to prevent the car from answering car
calls when no one is in the car.

Inputs and Outputs


None.

Installation Parameters
Name Group Description Disable
ANS 3 Anti-nuisance car call limit 0

Setup
The ANS parameter need to be defined with the number of calls that trigger this operation when the load
is anti-nuisance. Valid values range from 0 to 255.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 17 of 235

Attendant Operation (ATT)


Feature Description
Attendant operation is activated by a switch located in the car operating panel. The car operated
automatically except that judgment as to car loading, door closing, and hall call bypass are made by the
attendant.
Door operation and the starting of the car are performed by applying constant pressure to the door close
button. Constant pressure applied to the non-stop button bypasses hall calls as the car travels through the
hoist way to serve registered car calls. Nudging, door protection devices and load weighing bypass are
inhibited.

Inputs and Outputs


Name I/O# I/O Link Description Active
ATK 375 Input Car Attendant operation switch H
DCB 381 Input Car Door close button H
FDL 386 Output Car Further demand lamp -
ATTD(ISD) 390 Input Car Attendant down direction button H
ATTU(ISU) 392 Input Car Attendant up direction button H
NSB 394 Input Car Non-stop button H
NSLC 395 Output Car Non-stop lamp -
FDLD 427 Output Car Attendant further demand down lamp -
FDLU 428 Output Car Attendant further demand up lamp -
ANNU01 - 481 - Output Car Annunciator panel up lanterns, -
ANNU80 560 landings 1 to 80
ANND01 - 561 - Output Car Annunciator panel down lanterns, -
ANND80 640 landings 1 to 80
ARL 1287 Output Hall Attendant running lamp -
NSLH 1297 Output Hall Non-stop lamp -

Installation Parameters
Name Group Description Disable
ANNU-T 3 Annunciator panel buzzer delay time 255
ATT 3 Attendant operation type N/A

Setup
The ATT parameter needs to be defined with the correct attendant operation type. The following values
are valid types:
· 0 = No annunciator panel, start with DCB
· 1 = No annunciator panel, start with ATTU/ATTD or DCB
· 2 = No annunciator panel, start with DCB
· 3 = Annunciator panel, start with DCB
· 4 = Annunciator panel, start with ATTU/ATTD or DCB
The inputs and outputs need to be addressed according to the attendant operation type selected.
If an annunciator panel is used, the ANNU-T parameter defines the time interval between buzzer pulses
when the car has demand. Note that a time of zero constantly sounds the buzzer.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 18 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

· 0 to 254 = 0 to 254 seconds


· 255 disables
Attendant operation can also be activated through EMS. Refer to the chapter Ring Communications,
Contractible bits to ensure the Attendant ring communnication bit is defined correctly.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 19 of 235

Available Signal Lamps


Feature Description
This chapters lists lamp and signal devices available for car, hall and lobby panel use.

Inputs and Outputs


Name I/O# I/O Link Description Active
ITLC 321 Output Car Moderate in-coming traffic lamp -
OTLC 322 Output Car Moderate out-going traffic lamp -
CSAL 337 Output Car Car secure access, landing secured lamp -
CDDL377 Outp Car Front -
ut car
down
directi
on
lamp
CDLD 378 Output Car Front car direction lamp down -
CUDL379 Outp Car Front -
ut car up
directi
on
lamp
CDLU 380 Output Car Front car direction lamp up -
EQL 383 Output Car Earthquake lamp -
FDL 386 Output Car Further demand lamp -
FSL 387 Output Car Fire service lamp -
CEL 388 Output Car Car emergency lamp (EHS operation) -
INLC 389 Output Car Independent service lamp -
NSLC 395 Output Car Non-stop lamp -
OLS 396 Output Car Overload lamp -
RCDLD 399 Output Car Rear car direction lamp down -
RCDDL 400 Output Car Rear car down direction lantern -
RCDLU 401 Output Car Rear car direction lamp up -
RCUDL 402 Output Car Rear car up direction lantern -
STC 414 Output Car Car stopped lamp -
RFSL 416 Output Car Rear fire service lamp -
RCEL 417 Output Car Rear car emergency lamp -
ROLS 418 Output Car Rear overload lamp -
RSTC 419 Output Car Rear car stopped lamp -
FDLD 427 Output Car Further demand lamp down -
FDLU 428 Output Car Further demand lamp up -
SESL 450 Output Car Fire hat jewel -
FSIILC 451 Output Car SES phaseII lamp -
ALBO 455 Output Car Alarm button lamp -
AAL 456 Output Car Alarm acknowledged lamp -
EMKL 457 Output Car Emergency medical technician lamp -
FSIIHC46 Outp Car SES -
6 ut Phase
II Hold
lamp

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 20 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

CDML 467 Output Car Down motion lamp -


CUML 468 Output Car Up motion lamp -
BATT 470 Output Car RCBII low battery lamp -
ARL 1287 Output Hall Attendant running lamp -
EPL 1292 Output Hall Priority lamp -
HDDL 1294 Output Hall Down direction lamp -
HUDL 1295 Output Hall Up direction lamp -
INLH 1296 Output Hall Independent service lamp -
NSLH 1297 Output Hall Non-stop lamp -
STH 1302 Output Hall Car stopped signal -
PKL 1304 Output Hall Park and shutdown lamp -

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 21 of 235

Name I/O# I/O Link Description Active


OOS1B 1305 Output Hall Car in service -
OOS1M 1306 Output Hall Car out of service, NAV or DBF -
OOS2B 1307 Output Hall Car in normal operation, NOR, PRK, or IDL -
OOS2M 1308 Output Hall Car not in normal operation -
DTP 1310 Output Hall Door time protection lamp -
EPR 1311 Output Hall EPO return lamp -
EPW 1313 Output Hall EPO wait to return lamp -
CHNL 1317 Output Hall Channeling lamp -
ITLH 1318 Output Hall Moderate in-coming traffic lamp -
OTLH 1319 Output Hall Moderate out-going traffic lamp -
SPTL 1320 Output Hall Standby power transfer lamp -
DMD 1324 Output Hall Car demand present lamp -
CFTS 1329 Output Hall Car Failed To Start lamp -
NORMLT 1351 Output Hall Normal operation lamp -
PRKLT 1352 Output Hall Car to landing, shutdown lamp -
CTLL 1353 Output Hall Car to landing lamp -
ISCL 1354 Output Hall Independent service lamp -
DISTL 1355 Output Hall Distress lamp -
MGPL 1362 Output Hall Motor generator set pilot lamp -
FUHL 1381 Output Hall Front up hall lantern -
FDHL 1382 Output Hall Front down hall lantern -
RUHL 1383 Output Hall Rear up hall lantern -
RDHL 1384 Output Hall Rear down hall lantern -
FSIILH 1385 Output Hall SES phaseII lamp -
DISL 1389 Output Hall ADA distress lamp -
HDML 1390 Output Hall Down motion lamp -
HUML 1391 Output Hall Up motion lamp -
FSR 2494 Output Group Fire Service Lamp, Group Link -
GFSL1-60 2564- Output Group Group Fire Service Lamp 1 - 60 -
2623
SPL 2495 Output Group Standby power lamp -
AEPS 2497 Output Group Not Answering priority call -
FSBPL1 2498 Output Group Fire service switch in BYPASS lamp 1 -
FSBPL2 2501 Output Group Fire service switch in BYPASS lamp 2 -
FKL1 2502 Output Group Fire service switch in ON lamp 1 -
FKL2 2503 Output Group Fire service switch in ON lamp 2 -
GSAL 2533 Output Group Group secured lamp -
TFL 2540 Output Group Transfer floor lamp -

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 22 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

Cafeteria Position (CFT)


Feature Description
At the defined cafeteria landing, longer than normal door times are desirable to handle additional traffic.

Inputs and Outputs


None.

Installation Parameters
Name Group Description Disable
CFT-P 2 Cafeteria landing position 255
CFT-NT 2 Cafeteria landing door time N/A
EN-CK 3 Enable cancel door time 0

Setup
The CFT-P parameter needs to be defined to a valid building landing:
· 1 to 64 = landings 1 to 64
· 255 = disabled
The CFT-NT parameter needs to be defined to the desired door time at the cafeteria landing position.
· 0 to 255 = 0 to 25.5 seconds
Under normal operation the door close button does not cancel door times. If desired, the door close
button is allowed to cancel the door times when the EN-CK parameter is set to the value 2.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 23 of 235

Call Generation, Random


Feature Description
The random call generator registers car calls for the car and hall calls for the group.

Inputs and Outputs


None.

Installation Parameters
Name Group Description Disable
RAND-H 5 Random hall call generator time 0
RAND-C 5 Random car call generator time 0

Setup
To activate the random hall call generator, the RAND-H parameter needs to be defined.
· 0 = Disabled
· 1 to 255 = A hall call is generated every 1 to 255 seconds
To activate the random car call generator, the RAND-C parameter needs to be defined.
· 0 = Disabled
· 1 to 255 = A car call is generated every 1 to 255 seconds

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 24 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

Cancel Door Dwell Time


Feature Description
Activation of the door close button or the car call button cancels the remaining door dwell time; the doors
begin to close immediately. Note that some regions have handicap codes that do not allow this feature.

Inputs and Outputs


None.

Installation Parameters
Name Group Description Disable
EN-CK 3 Enable cancel door time 0

Setup
The EN-CK parameter defines how the door dwell time can be canceled.
· 0 = disabled
· 1 = enabled, car button cancels door dwell
· 2 = enabled, door close button cancels door dwell
Note the some regions do not allow this feature to be enabled.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 25 of 235

Car Call Card Reader, car link (CRC)


Feature Description
The car calls can be activated from a car call card reader located in the car or hall. Each location has two
possible card reader types supported.
The first type allows all car calls when a valid card is read by the reader.
The second type uses single inputs for each landing. When a valid card is inserted into the reader, the
card reader activates an input for one or more landings thus allowing car calls to be entered to those
landings. Additionally, card reader operation is controlled globally by another input which allows all
floors to become accessible.
Note that fire service operations and emergency hospital operations override car call card reader security.

Inputs and Outputs


Name I/O# I/O Link Description Active
CRIC01 - 161 - Input Car Car call card reader input, *
CRIC80 240 landings 1 to 80
RCRIC01 - 241 - Input Car Rear car call card reader input, *
RCRIC80 320 landings 1 to 80
CCRCCC 326 Input Car Car call card reader contact H
CCRCCH 1349 Input Hall Car call card reader contact H
* See setup section for active states

Installation Parameters
Name Group Description Disable
EN-CRC 7 Enable car call card reader operation 0

Setup
Car call card reader operation can be activated by the CCRCCC or CCRCCH inputs, or by a request from
EMS. If EMS is not the only source used to activate card reader operation, at least one of the mentioned
inputs needs to be addressed. These signals are considered to be the card reader contact inputs which
activate/de-activate card reader operation.
The EN-CRC parameter needs to be defined according to the desired car call card reader operation.
· 0 = All car calls allowed.
· 1 = Activation of card reader allows calls.
· 2 = Same as type 1, except ISC operation allows calls to secured landings.
· 3 = Activation of card reader, and activation (high) of CRIC or RCRIC allows car calls at the
specific landings. If card reader is not active, allow car calls to all landings.
· 4 = Same as type 3, except ISC operation allows calls to secured landings.
· 5 = Activation of card reader, and activation (low) of CRIC or RCRIC allows car calls at the
specific landings. If card reader is not active, allow car calls to all landings.
· 6 = Same as type 5, except ISC operation allows calls to secured landings.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 26 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

Car Call Card Reader, hall link (CRH)


Feature Description
The car calls can be activated from a car call card reader located in the car or hall. Each location has two
possible card reader types supported.
The first type activates all car calls when a valid card is read by the reader.
The second type uses single inputs for each landing. When a valid card is inserted into the reader, the
card reader activates an input for one or more landings thus allowing car calls to be entered to those
landings. Additionally, card reader operation is controlled globally by another input which allows all
floors to become accessible.
Note that fire service operations and emergency hospital operations override car call card reader security.

Inputs and Outputs


Name I/O# I/O Link Description Active
CRIH01 - 1125 - Input Hall Front car call card reader input, *
CRIH80 1204 landings 1 to 80
RCRIH01 - 1205 - Input Hall Rear car call card reader input, *
RCRIH80 1284 landings 1 to 80
CCRCHH 1345 Input Hall Car call card reader contact H
* See setup section for active states

Installation Parameters
Name Group Description Disable
EN-CRH 7 Enable car call card reader operation 0

Setup
Car call card reader operation is activated by the CCRCHH input. This signal is considered to be the
card reader contact input which activates/de-activates card reader operation
The EN-CRH parameter needs to be defined according to the desired car call card reader operation.
· 0 = All car calls allowed.
· 1 = Activation of card reader allows calls.
· 2 = Same as type 1, except ISC operation allows calls to secured landings.
· 3 = Activation of card reader, and activation (high) of CRIH or RCRIH allows car calls at the
specific landings. If card reader is not active, allow car calls to all landings.
· 4 = Same as type 3, except ISC operation allows calls to secured landings.
· 5 = Activation of card reader, and activation (low) of CRIH or RCRIH allows car calls at the
specific landings. If card reader is not active, allow car calls to all landings.
· 6 = Same as type 5, except ISC operation allows calls to secured landings.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 27 of 235

Car Call Cutoff


Feature Description
Upon activation, the car no longer serves car calls. Hall calls are answered normally.

Inputs and Outputs


Name I/O# I/O Link Description Active
CCOC 420 Input Car Car call cutoff input L
CCOH 1289 Input Hall Car call cutoff input L
GCCO 2491 Input Group Car call cutoff input L

Installation Parameters
None.

Setup
At least one of the inputs needs to be addressed.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 28 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

Car Calls Behind


Feature Description
The car calls behind feature allows car calls to be registered anywhere in the building. Normally, car
calls are only allowed to be registered in the direction the car is currently moving.

Inputs and Outputs


None.

Installation Parameters
Name Group Description Disable
EN-CCO 3 Enable car calls in the opposite direction 0

Setup
The EN-CCO parameter defines if car calls are allowed in the opposite direction of the car's current
direction.
· 0 = Disabled, car calls allowed in current direction
· 1 = Enabled, car calls allowed always

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 29 of 235

Car Calls to Terminal Landings


Feature Description
If the controller has switches available, car calls to the terminal landing can be defined. When activated
the car registers a call to either the bottom or top landing, dependent upon the active switch.

Inputs and Outputs


Name I/O# I/O Link Description Active
CCBLC 724 Input Car Car call to the bottom landing H
CCTLC 725 Input Car Car call to the top landing H
CCBL 2487 Input Group Car call to the bottom landing H
CCTL 2488 Input Group Car call to the top landing H

Installation Parameters
None.

Setup
The inputs must be addressed correctly.
Note that for buildings with Odd Travel, the calls to the top or bottom landing are dependent upon the
RSL address in the EEPROM for car calls. This requires that the car call addresses above the top landing
and below the bottom landing are 00-0.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 30 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

Card Reader Lock down (CRL)


Feature Description
Card reader lock down (secure and shutdown) operation returns the car to a defined landing and shuts the
car down with the doors in a defined state. All registered car calls are answered prior to entering this
operation.

Inputs and Outputs


Name I/O# I/O Link Description Active
HCRC 2496 Input Group Hall call card reader contact H

Installation Parameters
Name Group Description Disable
EN-CRC 7 Enable car call card reader operation 0
SAR-P 7 Secure return position 255
SAR-DR7 Door N/A
state at
the
Secure
return
positio
n

Setup
Secure and shut down operation is activated using the HCRC input.
The EN-CRC parameter needs to be defined.
· 9 = Secure and shut down
The SAR-P parameter must be defined with the CRL return landing.
· 1 to 64 = landing 1 to 64
· 255 = disabled
The SAR-DR parameter must be defined with the CRL door state at the return landing.
· 0 = Park with both doors closed
· 1 = Park with the front door opened
· 2 = Park with the rear door opened
· 3 = Park with both doors opened

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 31 of 235

Card Reader Operation (CRO)


Feature Description
The card reader operational mode has a single input for each landing. When a valid card is inserted into
the reader, car calls are allowed to one or more landings, depending on the card. Additionally, card
reader operation is controlled globally by another input which allows all floors to be accessible. The car
returns to a defined landing position after all demand for the car has been served.
Note that fire service operations and emergency hospital operations override car call card reader security.

Inputs and Outputs


Name I/O# I/O Link Description Active
CRIC01 - 161 - Input Car Car call card reader input, *
CRIC80 240 landings 1 to 80
RCRIC01 - 241 - Input Car Rear car call card reader input, *
RCRIC80 320 landings 1 to 80
CCRCCC 326 Input Car Car call card reader contact H
CCRCCH 1349 Input Hall Car call card reader contact H
* See setup section for active states

Installation Parameters
Name Group Description Disable
EN-CRC 7 Enable car call card reader operation 0
SAR-P 7 Secure return position 255
SAR-DR 7 Door state at the Secure return position N/A

Setup
Car call card reader operation can be activated by the CCRCCC or CCRCCH inputs, or by a request from
EMS. If EMS is not the only source used to activate card reader operation, at least one of the mentioned
inputs needs to be addressed.
The SAR-P parameter must be defined with the CRL return landing.
· 1 to 64 = landing 1 to 64
· 255 = disabled
The SAR-DR parameter must be defined with the CRL door state at the return landing.
· 0 = Park with both doors closed
· 1 = Park with the front door opened
· 2 = Park with the rear door opened
· 3 = Park with both doors opened
The EN-CRC parameter needs to be defined according to the desired car call card reader operation.
· 7 = Activation of card reader, and activation (low) of CRIC or RCRIC allows car calls at the
specific landings. If card reader is not active, allow car calls to all landings. Automatic
return to the SAR-P landing.
· 8 = Same as type 7, except ISC operation allows calls to secured landings.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 32 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

Car Failed To Start (CFTS)


Feature Description
The car failed to start signal alerts building personnel of a potential elevator problem. The signal is
activated immediately when the car enters Door Time Open protection, Door Time Close protection, or
Drive Brake Failure. The signal is activated after 30 seconds when the car enters Not Available or
Emergency Stop.

Inputs and Outputs


Name I/O# I/O Link Description Active
CFTS 1329 Output Hall Car failed to start lamp -

Installation Parameters
None.

Setup
The CFTS signal must be addressed to a hall link output.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 33 of 235

Car Position Contacts (CPC)


Feature Description
The car position contacts are used to track the cars actual position in the hoistway via outputs for each
landing. It's typical application is to drive a multilight position indicator.

Inputs and Outputs


Name I/O# I/O Link Description Active
CPC01 - 1765 - Output Hall Car Position Contacts, Landings 1 To 80 -
CPC80 1844

Installation Parameters
Name Group Description Disable
CPC-O 8 Car Position Contacts Options N/A

Setup
To track the car's actual position in the hoist way, each landing needs to be assigned to the corresponding
CPC output.
If the “C” bit of CPC-O is active, the CPC01-CPC80 outputs will be transmitted on the Car Link. If the
“H” bit of CPC-O is active, the CPC01-CPC80 outputs will be transmitted on the Hall Link. If both the
“C” and “H” bits of CPC-O are active, the CPC01-CPC80 outputs will be transmitted on both the Car and
Hall links.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 34 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

Car Secure Access


Feature Description
Car secure access secures, de-secures, and clears security codes assigned to each car call button. If a car
call button is secured, the call is not registered unless a landing access code is correctly entered using
some of the car call buttons.
Selection and changing of the landing access codes, is done on each car operating panel for each landing
using the car secure access switch.
When car secure access is enabled for the group, the group secured lamp is illuminated. When a car call
to a secured landing is attempted, the landing secured lamp in the car operating panel is illuminated. The
landing secured lamp remains illuminated for a set period of time or until a valid landing access code is
entered.
Note that fire service operations and emergency hospital operations override the car secure access
security.
Note that the car secure access switch is inoperative if the group secure access switch is active. This
prevents the landing access codes from being changed when secure access is active. Landings can fall
into one of three categories:
· Secured Landing Landing always requires landing access code or master access code
to be served
· De-secured Landing Landing requires landing access code or master access code to be
served if the group secure access switch is active
· Cleared Landing Landing without a landing access code assigned, always served

Inputs and Outputs


Name I/O# I/O Link Description Active
CSA1 329 Input Car Car secure access car button 1 H
CSA2 330 Input Car Car secure access car button 2 H
CSA3 331 Input Car Car secure access car button 3 H
CSA4 332 Input Car Car secure access car button 4 H
CSA5 333 Input Car Car secure access car button 5 H
CSA6 334 Input Car Car secure access car button 6 H
CSAC 335 Input Car Car secure access switch, CLEAR position H
CSAK 336 Input Car Car secure access switch, SECURE position H
CSAL 337 Output Car Car secure access landing secured lamp -
GSAK 2532 Input Group Car secure access group switch H
GSAL 2533 Output Group Car secure access group lamp -

Installation Parameters
Name Group Description Disable
SAC-D1 7 Secure access master code digit 1 0
SAC-D2 7 Secure access master code digit 2 0
SAC-D3 7 Secure access master code digit 3 0
SACTYP 7 Secure access characteristics 255

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 35 of 235

Setup
CSA1 through CSA6 are assigned the same addresses as 6 of the first 10 front car buttons, which are used
by the passengers to enter the landing access codes and master access codes. These need to be addressed
to disable the buttons TTL. Note that only front car buttons can be used as secure access buttons, and
that some odd travel setups may reduce the number of possible security codes.
The three position spring loaded toggle switch needs to be addressed to the CSAC and CSAK inputs,
while the "Reserved Landing" sign is addressed to the output CSAL. The group input and output, GSAK
and GSAL, need also to be addressed.
The SAC-D1, SAC-D2 and SAC-D3 parameters are assigned the three digit master code, respectively.
· 1 to 10 = valid car call button 1 to 10
· When the master code is programmed into these three parameters, the button number is used.
For example, if the master code was the first three front car call buttons, the SAC-D1, SAC-
D2, and SAC-D3 parameters would be assigned 1, 2, and 3, respectively.
The SACTYP parameter defines how secure access operation operates.
· 0 = Landings cleared at any time, ISC does not override security
· 1 = Landings cleared at any time, ISC overrides security
· 10 = Landings cleared only when secured, ISC does not override security
· 11 = Landings cleared only when secured, ISC overrides security
· 255 = Disabled
To assign a landing access code to a landing:
· Place the car secure access switch in the SECURE (CSAK) position.
· Press the car button of the landing to be secured.
· Use the defined six car buttons to enter the 3-digit master access code.
· Use the defined six car buttons to enter a 3-digit landing access code.
· Release the car secure access switch.
· The landing is now secured.
To desecure a landing without clearing the landing access code:
· Place the car secure access switch in the CLEAR (CSAC) position.
· Press the car button of the landing to be desecured.
· Use the defined six car buttons to enter a 3-digit landing access code.
· Release the car secure access switch.
· The landing is now desecured.
To secure a desecured landing without changing the landing access code:
· Place the car secure access switch in the SECURE (CSAK) position.
· Press the car button of the landing to be secured.
· Use the defined six car buttons to enter a 3-digit landing access code.
· Release the car secure access switch.
· The landing is now secured.
To clear a landing access code:
· Place the car secure access switch in the CLEAR (CSAC) position.
· Press the car button of the landing to be cleared..
· Use the defined six car buttons to enter a 3-digit master access code.
· Release the car secure access switch.
· If the SACTYP parameter is less than 10 or if the landing is secured, the landing access code
is cleared.
· The landing is now desecured.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 36 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

To access a secured landing:


· Press the car button of the target landing.
· The landing secured lamp should illuminate.
· Enter the landing access code or the master access code.
· The car button for the selected floor should illuminate and the car should travel to the target
landing.

Refer to the chapter Ring Communications, Contractible bits to ensure the secure access ring
communnication bit is defined correctly.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 37 of 235

Car to Landing Operation


Feature Description
Each car has a three position car to landing spring loaded switch with designations of OPEN, DOOR,
CLOSE. The neutral position is the DOORS position.
Activation of the car to landing feature via the OPEN signal, returns the car to the landing, answering
calls, and opens the defined door.
Activation of the car to landing feature via the CLOSE signal can only be performed when the car is in
ISC mode and at the defined landing position with a door opened. In this case the doors close and the car
is shutdown on ISC mode. A door is reopened by placing the switch in the OPEN position.

Inputs and Outputs


Name I/O# I/O Link Description Active
CTL 1290 Input Hall Car to landing switch H
PKS 1298 Input Hall Car to landing shutdown switch *
PRKLT 1352 Output Hall Car to landing, shutdown lamp -
CTLL 1353 Output Hall Car to landing lamp -
* - Polarity of the PKS switch is defined by the parameter PKSTYP

Installation Parameters
Name Group Description Disable
CTL-P 3 Car to landing position 255
CTL-O 3 Car to landing options N/A
PKSTYP 7 Car to landing shutdown switch polarity N/A

Setup
The CTL-P parameter defines the return landing. To disable CTL operation, set CTL-P to 255. The
CTL-O parameter is a bitmask which defines the following options:
· F bit = 0: keep the front doors closed at the CTL position
· F bit = 1: open the front doors at the CTL position
· R bit = 0: keep the rear doors closed at the CTL position
· R bit = 1: open the rear doors at the CTL position
· H bit = 0: answer both car calls and hall calls when returning
· H bit = 1: answer only car calls when returning
The PKSTYP parameter defines the polarity of the PKS input of the toggle switch.
· 0 = The PKS input is active low
· 1 = The PKS input is active high
The inputs needs to be addressed to the three position switch.
Note: To perform the shutdown feature, the car must be at the CTL-P landing position on ISC mode,
with a door open.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 38 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

Channeling (CHN)
Feature Description
Elevator performance throughout the morning up-peak period is measured by the speed in which people
are moved from the lobby to their respective floors within the building. The time spent by a passenger
during a typical up-peak run can be broken into two major phases: waiting time at the lobby and riding
time in the car.
Moderate Incoming Traffic (MIT) provides a means to move large amounts of people into the building.
This is accomplished by repeatedly sending the cars in the group to the lobby and dispatching these cars
when they have been loaded with passengers. A person boarding a car during MIT may enter a car call to
any floor above the lobby. As the car is loaded, many car calls are entered throughout the entire
building. The ride times and the round trip times of the car increase with the number of stops the car
must make on an up-peak run.
Up-peak performance could be enhanced if the round trip time of the car was decreased without
substantially increasing the waiting time at the lobby. Channeling enhances system performance during
up-peak by reducing the round trip time of each car. This is accomplished by grouping passengers going
to the same general area of the building into the same car. The rise is divided into sectors. When a car is
approaching the lobby, it chooses a sector and will only serve floors contained within that sector. The
round trip time of the car is decreased due to the small number of landings being served.
The size and number of sectors is the most important aspect of Channeling. The most significant
performance increase will result from sectors which share the same traffic density, not necessarily the
same size. High traffic zones should be placed into smaller sectors, as there exists a large probability that
car calls will be entered to most of the floors within the sector. Low traffic zones can be placed into
larger sectors because of the low probability of receiving car calls throughout the entire sector. Sectors
which share the same traffic density will have similar round trip times. If the round trip time of each car
is equivalent, the performance increase will be maximized.
As a general rule, the number of sectors should not exceed one less than the number of cars available for
Channeling. However, for maximum effect, the size and number of sectors should be based upon traffic
density, not necessarily the number of cars. Though theoretically a larger number of sectors has a bigger
performance improvement, it might cause passenger confusion and irritation, especially at a modernized
building or a site with an ever changing population. If the number of sectors is too small, resulting in
large sectors, Channeling performance benefits are reduced.

Inputs and Outputs


Name I/O# I/O Link Description Active
UPC 2535 Input Group OCSS Up-peak Clock H
CHNRQ 2537 Input Group CHN Group Request H
CHNL 1317 Output Hall Car Performing CHN Lamp -
ITLC 321 Output Car Car Performing MIT/CHN Lamp, Car Link -
ITLH 1318 Output Hall Car Performing MIT/CHN Lamp, Hall Link -
GMIT 2541 Output Group Group Performing MIT/CHN Lamp -

Installation Parameters
Name Group Description Disable
CHN-EN 4 CHN Enable 0
CHN-ST 4 CHN Traffic Induced Start Time 0
CHN-T 4 CHN Timeout 0

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 39 of 235

Name Group Description Disable


CHN-LD 4 CHN Load N/A
CHN-DT 4 CHN Dispatch Timeout N/A
CHN-EA 4 CHN Early Assignment N/A
CHN-AT 4 CHN Assignment Timeout N/A
CHN-O 4 CHN Options 0
CHN-T1 4 CHN Fixed Sector 1 Top Landing 255
CHN-T2 4 CHN Fixed Sector 2 Top Landing 255
CHN-T3 4 CHN Fixed Sector 3 Top Landing 255
CHN-T4 4 CHN Fixed Sector 4 Top Landing 255
CHN-T5 4 CHN Fixed Sector 5 Top Landing 255
CHN-T6 4 CHN Fixed Sector 6 Top Landing 255
CHN-T7 4 CHN Fixed Sector 7 Top Landing 255
CHN-T8 4 CHN Fixed Sector 8 Top Landing 255
CHN-A 4 CHN Sector Assigned To Car A 0
CHN-B 4 CHN Sector Assigned To Car B 0
CHN-C 4 CHN Sector Assigned To Car C 0
CHN-D 4 CHN Sector Assigned To Car D 0
CHN-E 4 CHN Sector Assigned To Car E 0
CHN-F 4 CHN Sector Assigned To Car F 0
CHN-G 4 CHN Sector Assigned To Car G 0
CHN-H 4 CHN Sector Assigned To Car H 0

Setup
The CHN-EN parameter enables Channeling operation.
· 0 = disable Channeling
· 1 = enable Static Channeling
· 2 = enable Fixed Channeling
· 3 = enable Fixed Non-Rotational Channeling
The CHN-ST parameter specifies the period in which two cars, with loads greater than or equal to CHN-
LD, must depart the lobby to begin traffic induced Channeling.
· 0 = disable traffic induced Channeling
· 1 to 255 = 1 to 255 seconds
The CHN-T parameter specifies the period in which no cars depart the lobby for Channeling to be
terminated.
· 0 to 255 = 0 to 255 seconds
The CHN-LD parameter defines the load state which activates Channeling. This load state is also used to
immediately dispatch a car from the lobby during Channeling.
· 0 to 5 = load states 0 to 5
The CHN-DT parameter specifies the period which must expire before a car is dispatched from the lobby
to serve demand in its sector.
· 0 to 255 = 0 to 255 seconds
The CHN-EA parameter specifies the period in RRT (dispatching) seconds at which the car will attempt
to assign a sector. This allows the ELD sector message to be displayed early.
· 1 to 9 = 1 to 9 RRT seconds

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 40 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

The CHN-AT parameter specifies the period of inactivity before releasing an assigned sector at the lobby,
in an attempt to get a new, more active, sector.
· 0 to 255 = 0 to 255 seconds
The CHN-O parameter specifies various Channeling options using a bit mask. All cars in the group must
have this parameter set to the same value.
· H = 0: hall ELD failures terminate Channeling
· H = 1: ignore hall ELD failures
· C = 0: car ELD failures terminate Channeling
· C = 1: ignore car ELD failures
· B = 0: disable basement sector during Static Channeling
· B = 1: enable basement sector during Static Channeling
· D = 0: up basement demand must depart at or below the lobby
· D = 1: up basement demand is allowed to travel above the lobby
· U = 0: OCSS up-peak clock activates Channeling after a car departs lobby
· U = 1: OCSS up-peak clock immediately activates Channeling
The CHN-T1 through CHN-T8 parameters specify a set of fixed sectors. CHN-T1 specifies the top
landing of the first fixed sector. If a basement sector is desired, CHN-T1 must be set to the landing
below the lobby. If no basement sector is desired, CHN-T1 must be set to a position above the lobby.
The remaining sectors must specify landings above the lobby. The final sector must be set to the top of
the rise.
· 1 to 64 = landing 1 to 64
· 255 = disabled
The CHN-A through CHN-H parameters specify the sectors assigned to each car in the group during
Fixed Non-Rotational Channeling.
· 0 = disabled
· 1 to 8 = sector 1 to 8
Static Channeling
Static Channeling divides the floors above the lobby into equal sized sectors, based upon the number of
cars in the group available for Channeling. It is also possible, to define the basement as a sector. If the
number of cars in the group changes, the Static sectors will be adjusted accordingly. Static Channeling
performance is maximized when the traffic distribution of the rise is evenly distributed.
The number of Static sectors calculated is one less than the number of cars in the group available for
Channeling. Should the group have only one car available for Channeling, one Static sector will be used.
If the “B” bit of the CHN-O parameter is set to zero or the number of cars available for Channeling is less
than three, a basement sector will not be calculated. The bounds of the Static sectors will be calculated
by partitioning the floors above the lobby into equal sized sectors and distributing any extra floors among
the lowest sectors.
If the “B” bit of the CHN-O parameter is set to one and the number of cars available for Channeling is
three or more, a basement sector will be calculated. The first Static sector will range from the bottom of
the rise to the floor below the lobby. The remaining Static sectors will be calculated by partitioning the
floors above the lobby into equal sized sectors and distributing any extra floors among the lowest sectors.
When the number of cars in the group available for Channeling changes, the Static sectors will be
adjusted accordingly and the new sectors will be used by the next car which assigns itself to a sector.
This means there may be a period of overlap, as the cars switch from the old set of Static sectors to the
new set of Static sectors.
Static Channeling is enabled by setting the CHN-EN parameter to one.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 41 of 235

Fixed Channeling
Static Channeling is most effective when the traffic density of the building is evenly distributed
throughout the entire rise. However, if the traffic density of the rise is not even, Static Channeling may
over-serve some portions of the rise and under-serve other portions of the rise.
To address this problem, Fixed Channeling was created. During Fixed Channeling, a rise is divided into
a set of Fixed sectors, which are defined in the CHN-T1 through CHN-T7 parameters. The Fixed sectors
maximize Channeling performance by evenly distributing the traffic in the building within the sectors.
The number of Fixed sectors may not exceed one less than the number of cars in the group available for
Channeling.
If no basement sector is desired, the first sector will begin at the floor above the lobby and end at CHN-
T1. The second sector will begin at the floor above CHN-T1 and end at CHN-T2. The final Fixed sector
must be set to the top floor in the rise.
If a basement sector is desired, CHN-T1 should be set to the floor below the lobby. The first sector will
begin at the bottom of the rise and end at CHN-T1. The second sector will begin at the floor above the
lobby and end at CHN-T2. The third sector will begin at the floor above CHN-T2 and end at CHN-T3.
The final Fixed sector must be set to the top floor in the rise.
If the Fixed sectors are invalid, Static Channeling will be performed. If the number of cars in the group
available for Channeling falls below that required to use the Fixed sectors, Static Channeling will be
performed. Once the number of cars in the group available for Channeling is at least one greater than the
number of Fixed sectors, Fixed Channeling will be resumed.
Fixed Channeling is enabled by setting the CHN-EN parameter to two.
Fixed Non-Rotational Channeling
During Fixed Non-Rotational Channeling, a set of Fixed sectors, which are defined in the CHN-T1
through CHN-T8 parameters, are permanently assigned to specific cars in the group. This reduces the
passenger confusion caused by assigning a car to a different sector each time it arrives at the lobby,
especially at sites with a constantly changing population.
Furthermore, some lobbies are designed in a way which prevents passengers from being able to see all of
the Hall ELDs at the same time. In this case, Static and Fixed Channeling might not be feasible, as
passengers can not determine which car to board. Assigning specific cars to specific sectors allows the
placement of physical signs in the lobby to direct passengers towards a specific set of cars and; therefore,
eliminates the need for ELDs.
If no basement sector is desired, the first sector will begin at the floor above the lobby and end at CHN-
T1. The second sector will begin at the floor above CHN-T1 and end at CHN-T2. The final Fixed sector
must be set to the top floor in the rise.
If a basement sector is desired, CHN-T1 should be set to the floor below the lobby. The first sector will
begin at the bottom of the rise and end at CHN-T1. The second sector will begin at the floor above the
lobby and end at CHN-T2. The third sector will begin at the floor above CHN-T2 and end at CHN-T3.
The final Fixed sector must be set to the top floor in the rise.
The CHN-A to CHN-H parameters are used to assign each car in the group to a specific sector by placing
the sector number into the appropriate car parameter. Up to eight Fixed sectors can be assigned to an
eight car group. However, it is recommended that each sector be served by at least two cars, just in case
one of the cars is taken out of service.
If the Fixed sectors are invalid or all of the Fixed sectors are not served by at least one car, Fixed Non-
Rotational Channeling will be terminated and MIT will be used to serve the up-peak traffic.
Fixed Non-Rotational Channeling is enabled by setting the CHN-EN parameter to three.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 42 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

Dynamic Channeling
Fixed Channeling addressed the problem of uneven traffic distribution throughout the rise by defining a
set of Fixed sectors. However, in a typical up-peak period, the traffic distribution of the rise changes as
specific portions of the rise are populated. In other words, to maximize Channeling performance, the
sector definitions should be modified throughout the up-peak period to maintain an even traffic
distribution in the sectors.
To address this scenario, the ADS Dynamic Channeling algorithm was created. The ADS maintains two
time periods related to the morning up-peak, the up-trend interval and the up-peak interval. The up-trend
interval is a fixed period of time in which up-peak is possible. The up-peak interval is a period during
the up-trend interval in which the ADS predicts the morning up-peak will occur.
The ADS can send sectors which are Static or Dynamic in nature. Static ADS sectors are sent to the
OCSS during the ADS up-trend interval. The number and size of Static ADS sectors is calculated by
dividing the floors above the lobby into equal sized sectors and distributing any extra floors among the
lower sectors. During the ADS up-peak interval, Dynamic sectors are sent to the OCSS. Dynamic
sectors vary in size and number based on the real-time prediction of the current up-peak period and the
history of previous up-peak periods in the building.
When the ADS begins up-peak, it places the group into MIT for a few minutes, by activating its up-peak
clock. If the up-peak traffic dissipates, the ADS will terminate MIT without ever triggering Channeling.
Should the up-peak traffic persist, the ADS will send sector definitions to place the group into
Channeling.
When the Dynamic sectors change, the new sectors will be used by the next car which assigns itself to a
sector. This means there may be a period of overlap, as the cars switch from the old set of Dynamic
sectors to the new set of Dynamic sectors.
Dynamic Channeling is enabled by setting up one of the Channeling algorithms described above. In
other words, Dynamic Channeling is enabled if the CHN-EN parameter is set to one, two, or three.
Channeling Activation
For Channeling to be activated, the CHN-EN parameter must be setup and the CHNRQ group request
must be active.
If the EMS activates its up-peak clock, the group will immediately perform Channeling. If the ADS
activates its up-peak clock and sends a set of sectors to each OCSS to be used during Channeling, the
group will immediately perform Channeling.
Channeling will be traffic induced if two cars depart the lobby with a load greater than or equal to the
CHN-LD parameter within the time specified by the CHN-ST parameter. Traffic induced Channeling
can be disabled by setting CHN-ST to zero. Because Channeling is designed to handle a steady up-peak
period, it is recommended that traffic induced Channeling be disabled.
If the “U” bit of the CHN-O parameter is set to zero and the UPC signal is active, Channeling will be
clock induced after one car leaves the lobby with a load greater than or equal to the CHN-LD parameter.
If the “U” bit of the CHN-O parameter is set to one and the UPC signal is active, Channeling will be
immediately clock induced. The UPC signal is disabled if the ADS or GCB is part of the group.
Channeling Termination
If the EMS activated Channeling by turning on its up-peak clock, Channeling will be terminated
immediately after the EMS deactivates its up-peak clock. If the ADS activated Channeling by turning on
its up-peak clock and sending a set of sectors, Channeling will be terminated immediately after the ADS
deactivates its up-peak clock.
If the OCSS activated Channeling, it will be terminated when the UPC signal is deactivated and the
period specified by the CHN-T parameter expires. Each time a car with a load greater than or equal to
CHN-LD leaves the lobby, Channeling will continue for at least the time specified by CHN-T. Because

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 43 of 235

Channeling is designed to handle a steady up-peak period, it is recommended that the CHN-T parameter
be set to zero to immediately terminate Channeling after the UPC signal is deactivated.
If a car’s Hall ELD is not functioning and the “H” bit of the CHN-O parameter is set to zero, Channeling
will be terminated for that car. If the “H” bit of the CHN-O parameter is set to one, that car will ignore
its Hall ELD failure.
If a car’s Car ELD is not functioning and the “C” bit of the CHN-O parameter is set to zero, Channeling
will be terminated for that car. If the “C” bit of the CHN-O parameter is set to one, that car will ignore
its Car ELD failure.
Serving A Sector
When a car is approaching the lobby and its RRT time to the lobby is less than or equal to the value
specified by the CHN-EA parameter, it will attempt to assign a sector.
A car serving a sector will only allow car calls in its sector and any existing car calls which may have
already been entered prior to the sector assignment. There are many hall call restrictions designed to
quickly return the car to the lobby during Channeling.
If the car has demand, it will remain at the lobby for the time specified by the CHN-DT parameter. If the
car’s load is greater than or equal to the CHN-LD parameter, it will immediately be dispatched to serve
its up-peak traffic.
If the car does not have demand and the time specified by the CHN-AT parameter expires, the car will
close its doors and attempt to assign a new, more active, sector. Note that this feature is disabled during
Fixed Non-Rotational Channeling, as the car can only serve one sector.
Serving A Duplicate Sector
If a car’s demand forces the car to stop at the lobby or bypass the lobby, that car will assign itself to a
sector, even if that sector is already being served by another car in the group. This scenario results in a
duplicate sector assignment.
A car serving a duplicate sector will only allow car calls in its sector and any existing car calls which
may have already been entered prior to the sector assignment. The car will not assign any hall calls, as
the car already serving its sector will be responsible for serving those calls.
If the car already serving the sector completes its lobby service or one-half the time specified by the
CHN-DT parameter expires, a car serving a duplicate sector will perform the normal sector processing
described above.
If the car’s load is greater than or equal to the CHN-LD parameter, a car serving a duplicate sector will
immediately be dispatched to serve its up-peak traffic.
Waiting For A Sector
If a car returned to the lobby, all of the sectors were being served, and there was no need to assign a
duplicate sector, that car will wait for a sector to become available.
While waiting for a sector, all car calls will be disabled. If a basement sector is being used, a car waiting
for a sector will not assign any hall calls. If a basement sector is not being used, the car will be allowed
to serve a down hall call at the lobby and basement hall calls.
Restricting Up Traveling Basement Demand
The “D” bit of the CHN-O parameter specifies how up traveling basement demand is served during
Channeling. If the “D” bit is set to zero, up traveling passengers must depart at or below the lobby. If
the “D” bit is set to one, up traveling passengers are allowed to enter car calls to any landing above the
car.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 44 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

Hall ELD Operation During Channeling


When a car assigns itself to a sector, it will activate its front hall lantern for two seconds and then display
the sector bounds on the Hall ELD. The sector bounds will be displayed until the car closes its doors at
the lobby.
Car ELD Operation During Channeling
When a car assigns itself to a sector and opens its doors at the lobby, it will display the sector bounds on
the Car ELD. Also, while the car is traveling above the lobby and restricting car calls, it will display the
floors that car calls are allowed after its doors have opened. The sector bounds information is cleared
when the doors are closed.
If the “D” bit of the CHN-O parameter is set to zero, the car will not allow up traveling basement demand
to enter car calls above the lobby. This restriction is displayed on the Car ELD.
Speech Operation During Channeling
When a car assigns itself to a sector and opens its doors at the lobby, it will speak its sector bounds. To
speak the sector bounds, several Special Speech messages must be setup and the Positional Speech
messages must be setup.
If the car is serving a single floor sector, the following message will be spoken:
· “CHN THIS ELE MSG” Special Speech Message
· “CHN SERVING MSG” Special Speech Message
· Bottom Bound Of Sector Positional Speech Message
If the car is assigned to a multiple floor sector, the following message will be spoken:
· “CHN THIS ELE MSG” Special Speech Message
· “CHN SERVING MSG” Special Speech Message
· Bottom Bound Of Sector Positional Speech Message
· “CHN THRU MSG” Special Speech Message
· Top Bound Of Sector Positional Speech Message

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 45 of 235

Contract Enabling
Feature Description
The contract chip software can be enabled or disabled using the service tool. The contract chips are
located in sockets Z36 and Z53.

Inputs and Outputs


None.

Installation Parameters
Name Group Description Disable
EN-CON 1 Enable contract software 0

Setup
The EN-CON parameter enables the contract software located in the contract EPROMs.
· 0 = Disabled
· 1 = Enabled
Note that the car must have a POR performed after the parameter is updated.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 46 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

Correction Operation (COR)


Feature Description
Correction operation is activated when the car needs to find it's position in the hoistway. This could
encompass a run to a terminal landing or a 1 floor run, dependant upon the MCSS.

Inputs and Outputs


None.

Installation Parameters
None.

Setup
This operation mode is triggered by the actual floor message from MCSS being invalid.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 47 of 235

Crowd Sensing
Feature Description
The crowd sensors are optional hardware devices designed to aid the dispatching of cars by providing a
count of waiting passengers.
A crowd sensor is mounted above the door jamb of each elevator. The crowd sensor determines if there
is a waiting passenger in front of this particular elevator door, and transmits this information to the
controller. If several sensors at the landing detect waiting passengers, the dispatching sends additional
cars to the landing to handle the additional traffic.
Crowd sensors can be installed at up to 5 landings in an elevator group.

Inputs and Outputs


Name I/O# I/O Link Description Active
CWDS1I1 1366 Input Hall Crowd sensor 1, input 1 H
CWDS1I2 1367 Input Hall Crowd sensor 1, input 2 H
CWDS1I3 1368 Input Hall Crowd sensor 1, input 3 H
CWDS2I1 1369 Input Hall Crowd sensor 2, input 1 H
CWDS2I2 1370 Input Hall Crowd sensor 2, input 2 H
CWDS2I3 1371 Input Hall Crowd sensor 2, input 3 H
CWDS3I1 1372 Input Hall Crowd sensor 3, input 1 H
CWDS3I2 1373 Input Hall Crowd sensor 3, input 2 H
CWDS3I3 1374 Input Hall Crowd sensor 3, input 3 H
CWDS4I1 1375 Input Hall Crowd sensor 4, input 1 H
CWDS4I2 1376 Input Hall Crowd sensor 4, input 2 H
CWDS4I3 1377 Input Hall Crowd sensor 4, input 3 H
CWDS5I1 1378 Input Hall Crowd sensor 5, input 1 H
CWDS5I2 1379 Input Hall Crowd sensor 5, input 2 H
CWDS5I3 1380 Input Hall Crowd sensor 5, input 3 H

Installation Parameters
Name Group Description Disable
# CRWD 5 Number of hardware crowd sensor landings 0
% CRWD 5 Percent of active crowd sensors N/A
CRWDF1 5 Crowd sensor 1 landing 255
CRWDF2 5 Crowd sensor 2 landing 255
CRWDF3 5 Crowd sensor 3 landing 255
CRWDF4 5 Crowd sensor 4 landing 255
CRWDF5 5 Crowd sensor 5 landing 255

Setup
The #CRWD parameter defines the number landings in the group that are equipped with hardware crowd
sensors.
· 0 = disabled
· 1 to 5 = 1 to 5 landings

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 48 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

The %CRWD parameter defines the percentage of crowd sensors at a landing that must be active to
indicate a crowd.
· 0 to 100 = 0 to 100 percent
The CRWDF1 through CRWDF5 define the landings equipped with crowd sensing hardware.
· 1 to 80 = landing 1 to 80
· 255 = disabled
Each crowd sensing unit attaches to the RSL serial link, using three inputs. These inputs are used to
transmit the passenger data to the car controller. For example, the first crowd sensing unit uses the inputs
CWDS1I1, CWDS1I2 and CWDS1I3.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 49 of 235

Delayed Car Protection Operation (DCP)


Feature Description
Delayed car protection operation nudges the doors closed and sounds the buzzer. The operation is
triggered when the doors are prevented from closing for a defined period of time while the car has
demand. If the car has no demand, this operation is canceled.

Inputs and Outputs


None.

Installation Parameters
Name Group Description Disable
DCP-T 3 Delayed car protection time N/A

Setup
The DCP-T parameter defines the time allowed for a passenger to delay the car before the car enters DCP
mode and attempts to nudge the doors closed and remove the delay.
· 0 to 20 = 20 seconds
· 21 to 255 = 21 to 255 seconds
Note that the delayed car protection time should be greater than the nudging time and less than the door
time close operation time-out.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 50 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

Disable Doors Feature


Feature Description
The door cycling operation can be disabled. Note that if the car is left in the grouup, it attempts to
answer hall demand.

Inputs and Outputs


Name I/O# I/O Link Description Active
DDOSC 726 Input Car Disable door opening switch L
DDOS 2490 Input Group Disable door opening switch L
DFD 1321 Input Hall Disable front door H
DRD 1322 Input Hall Disable rear door H

Installation Parameters
None.

Setup
Addressing the Inputs is the only required setup.
Activation of the DDOSC or DDOS input disables both doors and leaves the car in the group. This input
can be found in most controllers.
Activation of the DFD or DRD input disables the front or rear door respectively, and calls are not served
for the corresponding door. For example, if DRD is active, the rear door does not open and rear calls are
not registered.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 51 of 235

Dispatching
Feature Description
The default method of dispatching is Variable RSR. Also, the Advanced Dispatching System (ADS) is
supported using the A1130133BAA version of the ICSS2 and A1330107AAA version of the ADS.

Inputs and Outputs


None.

Installation Parameters
Name Group Description Disable
V-RSR 5 Enable Variable RSR N/A
RDSP-T 5 Re-dispatch timer N/A
GCB-EN 5 Enable GCB features 0
ADS-EN 5 Enable ADS features 0

Setup
Variable RSR is enabled by setting the V-RSR variable to a one. If this parameter is set to zero, Fixed
RSR will be used. Note that Variable RSR has been adopted as the current Otis dispatching
methodology. Therefore, the V-RSR parameter must always be set to one.
The period between re-dispatching of hall calls during Variable RSR is specified through the RDSP-T
parameter. The current Otis dispatching methodology requires this parameter to be set to 20, indicating
calls should be re-dispatched every two seconds. This parameter should not be set to a different value
unless CPU utilization requires a higher re-dispatch interval.
The ADS features must be enabled through the ADS-EN bit mask parameter to have an affect on
dispatching as follows:
Bit U = 0: Disable ADS Uppeak operation
Bit U = 1: Enable ADS Uppeak operation
Bit D = 0: Disable ADS Door Dwell operation
Bit D = 1: Enable ADS Door Dwell operation
Bit C = 0: Disable ADS Crowd Sensing operation
Bit C = 1: Enable ADS Crowd Sensing operation
Bit R = 0: Disable ADS RSR Plus operation
Bit R = 1: Enable ADS RSR Plus operation
The GCB features must be enabled through the GCB-EN bit mask parameter to have an affect on
dispatching as follows:
Bit U = 0: Disable GCB Uppeak operation
Bit U = 1: Enable GCB Uppeak operation
Bit D = 0: Disable GCB Downpeak operation
Bit D = 1: Enable GCB Downpeak operation
Bit C = 0: Disable GCB Crowd Sensing operation
Bit C = 1: Enable GCB Crowd Sensing operation

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 52 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

Bit I = 0: Disable GCB ICA operation


Bit I = 1: Enable GCB ICA operation

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 53 of 235

Distress Signal
Feature Description
Activation of the distress signal sounds a buzzer and illuminates a lamp in the lobby panel. The outputs
remain active until the distress reset is toggled.

Inputs and Outputs


Name I/O# I/O Link Description Active
DISTC 348 Input Car Distress button H
DISTBZ 1350 Output Hall Distress buzzer -
DISTL 1355 Output Hall Distress lamp -
DISTRS 1356 Input Hall Distress reset H

Installation Parameters
None.

Setup
Addressing the I/Os is the only required setup.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 54 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

Door Configuration: Front


Feature Description
An independent door is located at the front of the cab and it operates independently of the rear door. The
car is able to answer front and rear calls utilizing normal dispatching techniques.

Inputs and Outputs


Name I/O# I/O Link Description Active
FCCB01 - 01 - Input Car Front car call buttons, landing 01 - 80 H
FCCB80 80
CDDL377 Outp Car Front -
ut car
down
directi
on
lamp
CDLD 378 Output Car Front car direction lamp down -
CUDL379 Outp Car Front -
ut car up
directi
on
lamp
CDLU 380 Output Car Front car direction lamp up -
DCB 381 Input Car Front door close button H
DHB 382 Input Car Front door hold button H
FSL 387 Output Car Front fire service lamp -
CEL 388 Output Car Front car emergency lamp -
CDGD 421 Output Car Front car direction gong down -
CDGU 422 Output Car Front gong direction gong up -
CDML 467 Output Car Down motion lamp -
CUML 468 Output Car Up motion lamp -
FUHL01 - 805 - Output Hall Front up hall lantern, landing 01 - 80 -
FUHL80 884
FDHL01 - 885 - Output Hall Front down hall lantern, landing 01 - 80 -
FDHL80 964
HDML 1390 Output Hall Down motion lamp -
HUML 1391 Output Hall Up motion lamp -
FUHB01 - 1847- Input Group Front up hall button, landing 01 - 80 H
FUHB80 1926
FDHB01 - 1927- Input Group Front down hall button, landing 01 - 80 H
FDHB80 2006
FEHC01 - 2007- Input Group Front priority hall call, landing 01 - 80 H
FEHC80 2086

Installation Parameters
None.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 55 of 235

Setup
The first allowed mask must be set up to allow front hall and car calls.

Front Rear
This example shows a 4 stop elevator
with 3 front and 2 rear landings. The
4 4 allowed mask is setup as follows:

3
Front Rear
CUDE CUDE
2
4 1010 1010
3 0000 1110
1 2 1110 0000
1 1100 0000

The front car call buttons, front up and down hall buttons, front up and down hall lanterns and the front
door close button need to be addressed.
If in-car direction lamps are to be used, the CDLD and CDLU outputs, or the CDDL and CUDL outputs
need to be addressed.
If separate gong outputs are needed, the CDGD and CDGU outputs need to be addressed.
If priority service is required, the corresponding FEHC inputs must be defined and the first allowed mask
must have the 'E' bit set to a '1' for each allowed priority landing. If the priority service operation is
Emergency Hospital service, then the CEL output needs to be addressed.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 56 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

Door Configuration: Rear


Feature Description
An independent door is located at the rear of the cab and it operates independently of the front door. The
car is able to answer front and rear calls utilizing normal dispatching techniques.

Inputs and Outputs


Name I/O# I/O Link Description Active
RCCB01 - 81 - Input Car Rear car call buttons, landing 01 - 80 H
RCCB80 160
RCDLD 399 Output Car Rear car direction lamp down -
RCDDL 400 Output Car Rear car down direction lamp -
RCDLU 401 Output Car Rear car direction lamp up -
RCUDL 402 Output Car Rear car up direction lamp -
RDCB 403 Input Car Rear door close button H
RDHB 404 Input Car Rear door hold button H
RFSL 416 Output Car Rear fire service lamp -
RCEL 417 Output Car Rear car emergency lamp -
RCDGD 423 Output Car Rear car direction gong down -
RCDGU 424 Output Car Rear car direction gong up -
RUHL01 - 965 - Output Hall Rear up hall lantern, landing 01 - 80 -
RUHL80 1044
RDHL01 - 1045- Output Hall Rear down hall lantern, landing 01 - 80 -
RDHL80 1124
RUHB01 - 2087- Input Group Rear up hall button, landing 01 - 80 H
RUHB80 2166
RDHB01 - 2167- Input Group Rear down hall button, landing 01 - 80 H
RDHB80 2246
REHC01 - 2247- Input Group Rear priority hall call, landing 01 - 80 H
REHC80 2326

Installation Parameters
None.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 57 of 235

Setup
The first allowed mask must be set up to allow rear hall and car calls.

Front Rear
This example shows a 4 stop elevator
with 3 front and 2 rear landings. The
4 4 allowed mask is setup as follows:

3
Front Rear
CUDE CUDE
2
4 1010 1010
3 0000 1110
1 2 1110 0000
1 1100 0000

The rear car call buttons, rear up and down hall buttons, rear up and down hall lanterns and the rear door
close button need to be addressed.
If in-car direction lamps are to be used, the RCDLD and RCDLU outputs, or the RCDDL and RCUDL
outputs need to be addressed.
If separate gong outputs are needed, the RCDGD and RCDGU outputs need to be addressed.
If priority service is required, the corresponding REHC inputs must be defined and the first allowed mask
must have the 'E' bit set to a '1' for each allowed priority landing. If the priority service operation is
Emergency Hospital service, then the RCEL output needs to be addressed.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 58 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

Door Hold Button Operation (DHB)


Feature Description
Door hold button operation acts like a door open button, but the operation keeps the doors open for a
defined period of time. This time can be canceled by pressing a door close button or car call button.
This operation is not affected by other door monitoring systems. Note that hall calls are re-assigned to
other available cars.

Inputs and Outputs


Name I/O# I/O Link Description Active
DCB 381 Input Car Door close button H
DHB 382 Input Car Door hold button H
RDCB 403 Input Car Rear door close button H
RDHB 404 Input Car Rear door hold button H

Installation Parameters
Name Group Description Disable
DHB-T 3 Door hold button open time N/A
DHB-O3 Door N/A
hold
button
option
s
bitmas
k

Setup
The DHB-T parameter defines the time the doors remain open when a door hold button is pressed.
· 0 to 255 = 0 to 255 seconds
The DHB-O bitmask parameter defines door hold button options. Note that the door close buttons always
cancel the door hold button time and are not part of the options flag.
· C bit = 0, cancellation of the DHB time via car call registration is disabled
· C bit = 1, cancellation of the DHB time via car call registration is enabled
The door hold button inputs, DHB and RDHB, need to be addressed.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 59 of 235

Door Lock Failure Operation (DLF)


Feature Description
When the door locks fail, i.e. a short across a car or hall door lock is detected, the car is prevented from
running on automatic operation once stopped in a door zone. Once a door reaches the fully opened state,
it remains open. This car is shutdown until the fault is removed.
Some operational modes are allowed a limited override of this operation:
· If the car is on SES PhaseII operation (EFS), the car is not allowed to move and the doors
are controlled by the fire fighter until the fully opened state is reached. At this time, the
door remains opened and the car is effectively shutdown.
· If the car is on SES PhaseI operation (EFO), the car is allowed to complete the recall to the
target landing only if the car had motion prior to the door lock failure detection.
· If the car is on Earthquake operation (EQO), the car is allowed to complete the rescue to a
landing and open its doors prior to entering DLF operation.
· Inspection is not prohibited.
An output signal is sent to notify the passengers of the shutdown condition.

Inputs and Outputs


Name I/O# I/O Link Description Active
DLSC 471 Output Car Door Lock Failure, car shutdown lamp -
DLSH 1392 Output Hall Door Lock Failure, car shutdown lamp -

Installation Parameters
Name Group Description Disable
MCSS-O 9 MCSS Options 0

Setup
The Door Lock Failure feature requires four byte messages to be sent from the MCSS to the OCSS. The
MCSS must be setup to send four byte messages. The OCSS is setup to handle four byte MCSS messages
using the “B” bit of the MCSS-O parameter.
· Bit B=0: Two byte messages sent from the MCSS to the OCSS
· Bit B=1: Four byte messages sent from the MCSS to the OCSS
The output lamps need to be addressed to allow notification of this shutdown operational mode.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 60 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

Door Time Close Operation (DTC)


Feature Description
Door time close protection operation is entered when the doors do not close within a defined period of
time. Activation of this operation extinguishes the direction lanterns, clears car calls and reassigns hall
calls. The door attempts to close three times after the initial attempt. If the door fails to close during
these three tries, the stuck door remains open and attempts to close every two minutes.
Note that this operation does override fire service operation phaseII.

Inputs and Outputs


Name I/O# I/O Link Description Active
DTP 1310 Output Hall Door time protection lamp -

Installation Parameters
Name Group Description Disable
DTC-O 3 Door time close options bitmask N/A
DTC-T 3 Door time close time-out N/A

Setup
The DTC-T parameter defines the time allowed for the doors to reach the fully closed state before
entering the DTC mode. Note that the timer begins to count down when the door are commanded to
close.
· 0 to 255 = 0 to 255 seconds
The DTC-O bitmask parameter defines various options pertaining to the DTC operation. Note that these
option pertain to different door types and configurations.
· S bit = 0: Standard DTC processing enabled for front
· S bit = 1: Special DTC processing used with front doors utilizing a retiring cam
· B bit = 0: Buzzer inactive for front door
· B bit = 1: Buzzer sounds as front door closes
· C bit = 0: Front door triggers DTC with lack of DCL
· C bit = 1: Front door does not trigger DTC with lack of DCL
· F bit = 0: Front door triggers DTC with lack of DFC
· F bit = 1: Front door does not trigger DTC with lack of DFC
· s bit = 0: Standard DTC processing enabled for rear
· s bit = 1: Special DTC processing used with rear doors utilizing a retiring cam
· b bit = 0: Buzzer inactive for rear door
· b bit = 1: Buzzer sounds as rear door closes
· c bit = 0: Rear door triggers DTC with lack of DCL
· c bit = 1: Rear door does not trigger DTC with lack of DCL
· f bit = 0: Rear door triggers DTC with lack of DFC
· f bit = 1: Rear door does not trigger DTC with lack of DFC

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 61 of 235

The bitmask supports elevators with dissimilar doors. When one door on the elevator needs to have a
cam picked, i.e. a manual or freight door, the door that does not need a cam to be picked must have the
bitmask defined to not trigger on lack of DFC. This prevents the car from entering door time close
operation inadvertently. Note that when the bitmask parameter is defined to be zero, the standard DTC
operation for normal power operated doors is used.
The DTP lamp illuminates when the car shutdown after the 3 retries.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 62 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

Door Time Monitoring (PMO)


Feature Description
Door time monitoring adjusts the door open time to the minimum defined value when a reversal device
(light ray or electronic detection) is triggered. This feature attempts to reduce the door open time at the
landing.

Inputs and Outputs


None.

Installation Parameters
Name Group Description Disable
EN-PMO 3 Enable door time monitoring 0

Setup
The EN-PMO parameter needs to be defined.
· 0 = Disabled
· 1 = Enable at all landings.
· 2 = Enable at all landings except the lobby and cafeteria positions.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 63 of 235

Door Time Open Operation (DTO)


Feature Description
Door time open operation is entered when the doors do not fully open within a defined period of time.
Activation of this operation extinguishes the direction lanterns, clears the car calls, and reassigns the hall
calls. The car moves to three different landings to attempt to open the doors. If the door does not reach
fully open at any landing, the car is shut down with the doors closed.

Inputs and Outputs


Name I/O# I/O Link Description Active
DTP 1310 Output Hall Door time protection lamp -

Installation Parameters
Name Group Description Disable
DTO-O 3 Door time open protection options N/A
FDTO-T 3 Front door time open delay N/A
RDTO-T 3 Rear door time open delay N/A

Setup
The FDTO-T and RDTO-T parameters define the time allowed for the doors to reach the fully open state
before entering the DTO mode. Note that these times pertain to different door types and configurations.
· 0 to 255 = 0 to 255 seconds
The DTO-O bitmask parameter defines various options pertaining to the DTO operation. Note that these
options pertain to different door types and configurations.
· S bit = 0: Standard DTO processing enabled for front
· S bit = 1: Only issue a close command and then exit DTO for front
· B bit = 0: Buzzer inactive for front door
· B bit = 1: Buzzer sounds as front door opens
· s bit = 0: Standard DTO processing enabled for rear
· s bit = 1: Only issue a close command and then exit DTO for rear
· b bit = 0: Buzzer inactive for rear door
· b bit = 1: Buzzer sounds as rear door opens
The DTP lamp illuminates when the operational mode is entered.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 64 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

Door Dwell Times


Feature Description
The time interval that the elevator door remains open is independently adjustable for car and hall call
stops. Normally, more time is allowed for a hall call stop to allow extra time to enter the car from the
hallway. The timing is adjustable to suit the needs of the building.
The lobby door time may be defined longer to allow for the extra traffic at the lobby landing.

Inputs and Outputs


None.

Installation Parameters
Name Group Description Disable
CC_DT 3 Car Call Door Dwell Time N/A
HC_DT 3 Hall Call Door Dwell Time N/A
SST-DT 3 Standing Stop Door Dwell Time N/A
REV-DT 3 Reversal Door Dwell Time N/A
LOB-T 2 Lobby Door Dwell Time N/A

Setup
The CC-DT parameter defines the door dwell time for car calls.
· 5 to 255 = 0.5 to 25.5 seconds
The HC-DT parameter defines the door dwell time for hall calls.
· 5 to 255 = 0.5 to 25.5 seconds
The SST-DT parameter defines the door dwell time for hall calls which are answered by a car parked at
the hall call landing.
· 5 to 255 = 0.5 to 25.5 seconds
The REV-DT parameter defines the door dwell time for door reversals.
· 5 to 255 = 0.5 to 25.5 seconds
The LOB-T parameter defines the door dwell time for calls at the lobby.
· 1 to 255 = 0.1 to 25.5 seconds

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 65 of 235

Double Riser of Hall Buttons


Feature Description
The double riser feature allows two or more hall buttons at each landing to work in parallel. Activation
of any hall button, registers the call and illuminates corresponding hall buttons at the same landing.

Inputs and Outputs


Name I/O# I/O Link Description Active
FUHB01 - 1847- Input Group Front up hall buttons, landing 01 - 80 H
FUHB80 1926
FDHB01 - 1927- Input Group Front down hall buttons, landing 01 - 80 H
FDHB80 2006
RUHB01 - 2087- Input Group Rear up hall buttons, landing 01 - 80 H
RUHB80 2166
RDHB01 - 2167- Input Group Rear down hall buttons, landing 01 - 80 H
RDHB80 2216

Installation Parameters
None.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 66 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

Setup
Double riser is configured one of two ways, both producing the same result.
The first method shows all the hall buttons on the same link feeding into the same car controller. This
controller passes the hall call information to the other cars in the group.

Car Controllers

A B

RSL addresses for this landing


must be identical
RSL addresses for this landing
must be identical
RSL addresses for this landing
must be identical
RSL addresses for this landing
must be identical

Each car in the group has a switch-over module except the last one. This module is responsible for
connecting a car controller to the serial link. If one car can not read the serial link, the switch-over
module passes the link to the next car controller. The switch-over modules for this method are set up as
follows:

Secondary Risers communication links

Controller Controller Controller Controller


A B C D

SOM SOM SOM

Serial link

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 67 of 235

The second method shows the hall links physically separated from each other, and feed into separate
controllers. It does not matter if the hall button addresses are different, but it is recommended the
addresses are the same. The demand is passed along the ring to illuminate the second risers hall button.

Car Controllers

A C

RSL addresses for this landing


must be identical
RSL addresses for this landing
must be identical
RSL addresses for this landing
must be identical
RSL addresses for this landing
must be identical

Each of the serial links serve one-half of the entire group, and the location of the switch-over modules
reflects this. The switch-over modules for this method are set up as follows:

Secondary Risers communication links

Controller Controller Controller Controller


A B C D

SOM SOM

Serial link A Serial link B

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 68 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

Drive Brake Failure Operation (DBF)


Feature Description
If the DBSS is reported as not available, the car is commanded to stop at the next commitable landing,
open it's doors, and enter the drive brake failure operation.
Some fault conditions are self correcting. In order to attempt to return the car to normal operation, the
doors are cycled every two minutes. One example of a self correcting condition is an overheat condition.

Inputs and Outputs


None.

Installation Parameters
None.

Setup
This operation has no setup and can only be triggered from MCSS messages.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 69 of 235

Drives: Direct Drives


Feature Description
For elevators using a direct drive, some special configuration is required.

Inputs and Outputs


None.

Installation Parameters
Name Group Description Disable
MG-TIM 9 Motor generator time 0

Setup
The MG-TIM parameter must be equal to zero.
For selectable profiles, refer to the Drives: Velocity Profiles chapter.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 70 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

Drives: Group Successive Starting (GSS)


Feature Description
For cars with motor generator sets, the MG is controlled to minimize the power consumption while the
cars sits idle.
If the car is required to move while the MG set is powered down, the MCSS is commanded to power up
the MG set. Once the rated speed of the MG is reached, the car is allowed to move. If the car is idle for
a defined period of time, the MCSS is commanded to power down the MG set.
Group successive starting is needed when the building can not support the power consumption of two or
more generators powering up at the same time. This locks out all other generators from attempting to
power up until the first one is completely powered up.

Inputs and Outputs


Name I/O# I/O Link Description Active
MGPL 1362 Output Hall Motor generator set pilot lamp -

Installation Parameters
Name Group Description Disable
MG-TIM 9 Motor generator time 0
MG-DLY 9 Motor generator successive start delay N/A

Setup
The MG-TIM parameter defines the idle time before the car's generator can power down.
· 0 = Disabled
· 1 to 255 = 1 to 255 minutes
The MG-DLY parameter defines the amount of time the car delays between placing the power request on
the ring communications, and sending the "power up drive" message to the MCSS. Note that this is to
prevent two cars from powering up at the same time.
· 1 to 255 = period of delay as defined below
Actual delay = (RCB_NO - 1) * MG-DLY * 200ms.
The MGPL lamp is illuminated when the car is powered up.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 71 of 235

Drives: Velocity Profiles


Feature Description
The motion profile of the elevator can be selectable via EMS and OCSS.

Inputs and Outputs


None.

Installation Parameters
Name Group Description Disable
MG-PRO 9 Drive special profile selection 255
SESPRO 6 SES while on EQO drive profile 0

Setup
The SESPRO parameter defines the drive profile to use for fire service during earthquake operation.
· 0 = Disables
· 1 to 7 = Selects profile type 1 to 7
The MG-PRO parameter selects a user define drive profile.
· 0 to 7 = Selects profile type 0 to 7
· 255 = Selects default profile
Note that the default profile selection chooses type 0. During Up-peak, Down-peak and when the
MGPRO group request is active, the profile selection is type 1 when the default profile is selected.
Otherwise, the profile remains 0 through 7.
Note that the earthquake profile selection has highest priority and overrides other selections.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 72 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

E335M System Setup


Feature Description
The Elevonic 335M control system is designed for the modernization of Otis' and competitors' geared
UMV traction elevators. It replaces the existing relay-based controller, motor generator set, and the
electromechanical selector, thereby improving the elevators' overall reliability and performance. The
Elevonic 335M control system is designed to reuse the existing elevator machine, door operator, car and
hall fixtures and wiring where possible.
The Ring Car Board II (RCBII) is used for the Elevonic 335M system to provide both the car and group
dispatching control. The Elevonic 335M system may be configured for either simplex or multi car group
operation. Because of the capability to reuse existing door operators, car and hall fixtures, and wiring
where possible; new options were provided to the OCSS system to accommodate the E335M
requirements in order to keep the costs to a minimum.
The specific areas in OCSS affected for the E335M system are as follows:
· Remote Serial Link configuration
· Load weighing via the RSL

Inputs and Outputs


Name I/O# I/O Link Description Active
LW10 461 Input Car RSL load weighing signal - 10% H
LW30 462 Input Car RSL load weighing signal - 30% H
LW50 463 Input Car RSL load weighing signal - 50% H
LW80 464 Input Car RSL load weighing signal - 80% H
LW110 465 Input Car RSL load weighing signal - 110% H

Installation Parameters
Name Group Description Disable
RSLCFG 1 RSL Configuration for E335M 0
MCSS-O 9 MCSS Options (Load Weighing Type) 0

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 73 of 235

Setup
The remote serial link configuration must be determined for the contract. The RSL configuration
function allows one to redefine which remote serial link the car, hall, and group RSL I/Os are to be read
on. There are four different possible combinations based on the RSLCFG installation parameter:
RSLCFG
0 = Car I/O read from car link, Hall I/O read from hall link, Group I/O read
from group link
1 = Car I/O read from car link, Hall I/O read from car link, Group I/O read
from group link
2 = Car I/O read from car link, Hall I/O read from car link, Group I/O read
from car link
3 = Car I/O read from car link, Hall I/O read from hall link, Group I/O read
from car link
On the E335M system, the load weighing information is provided discretely to the OCSS via the car
remote serial link in lieu of being received from the MCSS. The “L” bit of the MCSS-O installation
parameter defines the method used to determine load weight.
MCSS-O Bit L=0: Load weight information sent from MCSS
Bit L=1: Load weight information sent from RSL discretes
There are five car RSL inputs associated with this function. Each RSL input represents a different
increment of load weight. The increments presently available are empty car (default), 10% of full load,
30% of full load, 50% of full load, 80% of full load, and 110% of full load. The following list shows the
relationship of the load weight to operational mode selections:
Load Weight Opmode Service Tool Display
Empty NOR/ANS 'E'
10% NOR/ANS '1'
30% NOR '3'
50% NOR/MIT/CHN '5'
80% LNS/MIT/CHN '8'
110% OLD 'F'
There are many different door operators that can be used on the E335MW system. These include manual
doors, freight doors, and semi-automatic doors. To allow proper operation with each door, the DTO and
DTC modes have been updated to perform special functions when eneabled. Refer to sections Door Time
Close Operation (DTC) and Door Time Open Operation (DTO).

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 74 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

Earthquake Operation (EQO)


Feature Description
Earthquake operation occurs when seismic activity is detected.
Resetting the elevator system after an earthquake is performed via a momentary switch located in the
machine room.
The operation can be triggered via the Otis counterweight sensor or the non-Otis seismic sensor.
The counterweight sensor produces a signal when the counterweight breaks free of the counterweight
rails. This signal forces the car to perform an emergency stop, and then rescue into a landing moving
away from the counterweight. Once at a landing, the doors open and the car shuts down. The car
remains out of service until the car is inspected and reset.
The seismic sensor produces a signal that forces the car to stop at the next commitable landing, open it's
doors and shut down. The car remains out of service until the car is inspected and reset.

Inputs and Outputs


Name I/O# I/O Link Description Active
EQCW 342 Input Car Earthquake counterweight derailment signal L
CEQRS 343 Input Car Earthquake reset switch H
EQL 383 Output Car Earthquake lamp -
EQSC 459 Input Car Earthquake detector L
EQMS 460 Input Car Earthquake mid-hoist way sensor *
AMF 1286 Input Hall Earthquake mid-hoist way sensor *
EQS 1293 Input Hall Earthquake detector L
GEQRS 2499 Input Group Earthquake reset switch H
* See setup for active state

Installation Parameters
Name Group Description Disable
AMF-P 6 About mid-hoist way position 255
SESPRO 6 SES during EQO drive profile 0
EQMS-L 6 Earthquake magnetic sensor zone - lower boundary 255
EQMS-U 6 Earthquake magnetic sensor zone - upper boundary 255
EQOTYP6 Earthq N/A
uake
Type

Setup
The EQCW, CEQRS, EQL, and GEQRS I/Os need to be addressed regardless of earthquake setup.
Earthquake can be triggered by the seismic detector. This detector can be located on the car link or the
hall link. The appropriate input, EQSC for the car link or EQS for the hall link, needs to be addressed.
When the car needs to rescue into a landing away from the counterweight, the magnetic sensor is to be
used. The magnetic sensor can be located on the car link or the hall link. The appropriate input, EQMS
for the car link or AMF for the hall link, needs to be addressed. An active state does not really exist. A

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 75 of 235

low signal from the magnetic sensor means the car is below the counterweight, while a high signal means
the car is above the counterweight.
To guarantee the integrity of the magnetic sensor, the sensor signal is checked with the current car
position. This check is done outside the boundary defined by the EQMS-L and EQMS-U parameters.
· 1 to 64 = landing 1 to 64
· 255 = disabled
When the car is within the defined boundary, the integrity check is not performed.
If the magnetic sensor is not used to detect counterweight positioning with respect to the car, the AMF-P
parameter needs to be defined.
· 1 to 64 = landing 1 to 64
· 255 = disabled
The AMF-P landing is the hoistway position where the car and the counterweight are located next to each
other. If this position does not correspond to landing, the AMF-P landing should be assigned as the next
higher landing position in the hoist way.
Note that resetting the earthquake inputs needs to be performed using both the CEQRS and GEQRS
inputs. If one is not used, default the input active.
The SESPRO parameter defines the drive profile to use for fire service during earthquake operation.
· 0 = Disables
· 1 to 7 = Selects profile type 1 to 7
Note that on some MCSS systems, the hoistway position is exactly known and may prompt the car to
rescue in a direction chosen by the MCSS.
Note that when the AMF-P has been correctly defined, it has rescue priority over the hoistway sensor.
When upgrading to the hoistway sensor, the AMF-P parameter must be set to 255.
The EQOTYP parameter defines if the door is allowed to open when the car is at a landing and the actual
position is invalid.
· 0 = Alway open the doors at a landing
· 1 = Open the doors at a landing only if the car has a valid position
If the car is not allowed to perform a correction run to a limit when on SES PhaseI operation, then the
door should never be allowed to open. To ensure the car is empty, prior to resetting off Earthquake
operation, the car must be run on Inpsection. Once this is done, the doors can not open and the car is
checked to be empty. This is an issue in L.A. on MRQ systems.
Refer to chapter Drives: Velocity Profiles for information regarding earthquakes during fire service
operations.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 76 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

Electroluminescent Display (ELD)


Feature Description
The ElectroLuminescent Display (ELD) is used to display information to elevator passengers. This
information consists of such things as car floor position, car direction, time, temperature, date, and
operation messages.
An ELD can be configured as either a Car ELD or a Hall ELD. Typically each car has an ELD mounted
inside the car cab. This ELD is referred to as the Car ELD. The Car ELD replaces the car position
indicator and can display emergency and informative messages, such as fire service or load weighing
messages. An ELD is also mounted in the hall on one or more floors. This ELD is referred to as the
Hall ELD. The Hall ELD replaces the hall position indicator and the hall lantern.
Each ELD system consists of the following hardware items:

a. ELD Interface Board


Contains the CPU, EPROM software, video drivers , input drivers, RS-485 serial
communication link for the EMS interface, and LEDs.

b. ELD Remote Station Interface Board


Contains the RSL circuitry that read in the OCSS RSL signals from either the Car or the
Hall RSL links. This board is mounted directly on the ELD Interface Board.

c. ELD Driver/Screen
Contains a video receiver driver and a glass screen with a 640 x 200 pixel resolution. This
assembly is attached to the ELD Interface Board through a ribbon cable.
The ELD operates using three EPROMs. They are installed in the U24, U25, and U26 sockets of the
ELD Interface Board. Socket U24 holds the operational software and sockets U25,U26 hold the font
information. The three EPROMs come as a set under the 30001 SCN number.
An optinal fourth EPROM is used for special contract configurations. This is a 128kByte EPROM and is
installed in the U61 socket of the ELD Interface Board.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 77 of 235

Inputs and Outputs


Name I/O# I/O Link Description Active
ELDOK 355 Car Input ELD operational status H
ELDCC1 365 Car Output ELD command bit 1 -
ELDCC2 366 Car Output ELD command bit 2 -
ELDCC3 367 Car Output ELD command bit 3 -
ELDCC4 368 Car Output ELD command bit 4 -
ELDCF1 369 Car Output ELD data bit 1 -
ELDCF2 370 Car Output ELD data bit 2 -
ELDCF3 371 Car Output ELD data bit 3 -
ELDCF4 372 Car Output ELD data bit 4 -
ELDFD 435 Car Output ELD floor display control bit -
ELDTD 436 Car Output ELD time display control bit -
ELDHC1 1331 Hall Output ELD command bit 1 -
ELDHC2 1332 Hall Output ELD command bit 2 -
ELDHC3 1333 Hall Output ELD command bit 3 -
ELDHC4 1334 Hall Output ELD command bit 4 -
ELDHF1 1335 Hall Output ELD data bit 1 -
ELDHF2 1336 Hall Output ELD data bit 2 -
ELDHF3 1337 Hall Output ELD data bit 3 -
ELDHF4 1338 Hall Output ELD data bit 4 -

Installation Parameters
Name Group Description Disable
ELD-T 8 ELD blank delay N/A

Setup
The following items must be setup to properly configure an ELD. The setup procedure for these items
are explained in the sections to follow.

a. ELD Interface Board Dipswitches


b. ELD Remote Station Interface Board Dipswitches
c. ELD Remote Station Interface Board Jumper Cables
d. ELD Function Setup
ELD Interface Board LED Definitions follow the setup procedures.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 78 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

ELD Interface Board Dipswitches


Dipswitch 2 (SW2)

Pos OPEN Definition CLOSE Definition Default


Setting
SW2-1 Display Status on LEDs Display Activity on LEDs CLOSED
SW2-2 Disable Enable Pixel Diagnostic OPEN
SW2-3 Disable Enable UART Test OPEN
SW2-4 Disable Enable POR Diagnostics OPEN
SW2-5 Disable Enable RSL Test Screen OPEN
SW2-6 Enable Channel Scrolling Disable OPEN
SW2-7 MM/DD/YY Date Format DD/MM/YY Date Format OPEN
SW2-8 Single Car / Lower Deck Upper Deck OPEN

Dipswitch 3 (SW3)
Positions 1 through 6
Positions 1 through 6 of dipswitch 3 are used to set the ELD address. The ELD address is used for
communications with the EMS. A unique ELD address is required for each ELD. This unique address
allows the EMS to distinguish communications among each ELD. The following tables show the default
ELD addressing scheme. The primary table is for single ELD configurations. The secondary table is for
when there are two separate ELDs used for one car.

Primary ELD Address Table:


Car ELD Hall ELD
Car ELD SW3 Settings ELD Address SW3 Settings
Address 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1
A 1 CCCCCO 9 CCOCCO
B 2 CCCCOC 10 CCOCOC
C 3 CCCCOO 11 CCOCOO
D 4 CCCOCC 12 CCOOCC
E 5 CCCOCO 13 CCOOCO
F 6 CCCOOC 14 CCOOOC
G 7 CCCOOO 15 CCOOOO
H 8 CCOCCC 16 COCCCC

Secondary ELD Address Table:


Car ELD Hall ELD
Car ELD SW3 Settings ELD Address SW3 Settings
Address 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1
A 17 COCCCO 25 COOCCO
B 18 COCCOC 26 COOCOC
C 19 COCCOO 27 COOCOO
D 20 COCOCC 28 COOOCC
E 21 COCOCO 29 COOOCO
F 22 COCOOC 30 COOOOC
G 23 COCOOO 31 COOOOO
H 24 COOCCC 32 OCCCCC
C = CLOSE Postion, O = OPEN Position

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 79 of 235

Positions 7 and 8

Pos OPEN Definition CLOSE Definition Default


Setting
SW3-7 Enable Deadman Timer (reset Disable CLOSE
EMS state if EMS is not active for
the last 1.2 sec)
SW3-8 Enable Car ELD Operation Enable Hall ELD Operation none

Dipswitch 4 (SW4)
The SW4 dipswitch is used for video timing. This dipswitch should be set as follows:

SW4 settings 8®1: OCOCCOOO

Jumper Switches

Jumper Description When to Install


JMP1 EMS 9600/19200 Baud Always between pin 1 and pin 2 (9600)
JMP2 Watchdog Enable Always
JMP3 RS-485 Terminator When the ELD is the last in the EMS RS-485 daisy chain.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 80 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

ELD Remote Station Interface Board Dipswitches


Dipswitches 1 through 6 (SW1-SW6)
The dipswitches on this board control the RSL addressing for communications with the OCSS. The RSL
addresses assigned to the Car ELD are different from those assigned to the Hall ELD.

There are six dipswitches that are used to set six different RSL addresses. The address is determined by
the binary pattern of the dipswitch setting. The dipswitch position labeled OPEN is equivalent to a
binary 1. For example, the numeral 5 is equal to a '000101' binary pattern and this is equivalent to a
'CCCOCO' dipswitch setting pattern.

Car ELD Hall ELD


Dip RSL Settings RSL Address Settings
Switch Address 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1
SW1 14 CCOOOC 4 CCCOCC
SW2 15 CCOOOO 59 OOOCOO
SW3 17 COCCCO not used XXXXXX
SW4 12 CCOOCC 57 OOOCCO
SW5 13 CCOOCO 58 OOOCOC
SW6 18 COCCOC 50 OOCCOC
C = CLOSE Postion, O = OPEN Position

Hall ELD Note: In the table above, dipswitch 1 of the Hall ELD is set to 4. This setting is used by the
ELD to determine the floor that it is installed on. The value should be set to the floor
number plus 3 (floor 1 set to 4, floor 2 set to 5, floor 3 set to 6, ... floor 54 set to 57).

Dipswitches 7 and 9 (SW7, SW9)


SW7: RSL line terminator. Set to terminate.
settings 2®1: CC

SW9: Shows ELD RSL health. Not implemented.


settings 4®1: OOOO

ELD Remote Station Interface Board Jumper Cables


A special Otis jumper cable must be connected to the J3 and J4 ports. This cable directs the RSL signals
to the proper ELD discrete inputs. One of two cable types may be used. One cable configures the RSL
signals for Car ELD operation and the other type configures the RSL signals for Hall ELD operation.
The cable part numbers are as follows:

Cable Required for Car ELD: Otis P/N AAA00174AAS002


Cable Required for Hall ELD: Otis P/N AAA00174AAS001

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 81 of 235

ELD Function Setup


The OCSS communicates with the ELD through the Car and Hall RSL links. The Car ELD is connected
to the Car RSL link and the Hall ELD is connected to the Hall RSL link. The ELD function related RSL
I/O must be configured to the RSL addresses in the tables below.

Car ELD Functions

RSL OCSS I/O


Car ELD Function Address-Bit Symbol
Car ELD Command Bit 1 12-1 ELDCC1
Car ELD Command Bit 2 12-2 ELDCC2
Car ELD Command Bit 3 12-3 ELDCC3
Car ELD Command Bit 4 12-4 ELDCC4
Car ELD Data Bit 1 13-1 ELDCF1
Car ELD Data Bit 2 13-2 ELDCF2
Car ELD Data Bit 3 13-3 ELDCF3
Car ELD Data Bit 4 13-4 ELDCF4
ELD Floor Display Control Bit 18-2 ELDFD
ELD Time Display Control Bit 18-1 ELDTD
"PRIORITY SERVICE" Message 18-3 none
"RESTRICTED FLOOR" Message 14-3 CSAL
Small Up Direction Arrow 15-2 CUDL
Small Down Direction Arrow 15-3 CDDL
Car Overload Symbol 15-4 OLS
"THIS ELEVATOR IS NEEDED FOR AN 17-1 FSL
EMERGENCY. PLEASE EXIT WHEN DOORS
OPEN." Message
"THIS ELEVATOR IS NEEDED FOR AN 17-2 CEL/EHS
EMERGENCY. PLEASE EXIT WHEN DOORS
OPEN." Message
"FURTHER DEMAND" Message 17-4 FDL

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 82 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

Hall ELD Function

RSL OCSS I/O


Hall ELD Function Address-Bit Symbol
Hall ELD Command Bit 1 57-1 ELDHC1
Hall ELD Command Bit 2 57-2 ELDHC2
Hall ELD Command Bit 3 57-3 ELDHC3
Hall ELD Command Bit 4 57-4 ELDHC4
Hall ELD Data Bit 1 58-1 ELDHF1
Hall ELD Data Bit 2 58-2 ELDHF2
Hall ELD Data Bit 3 58-3 ELDHF3
Hall ELD Data Bit 4 58-4 ELDHF4
Small Down Direction Arrow 59-2 HDDL
Small Up Direction Arrow 59-3 HUDL
Fireman's Service 50-1 none
“Otis Channeling” Message 50-2 ELDOC
Up Hall Lantern nn-3 1 FDHL01-
(Large Arrow) FDHL54
Down Hall Lantern nn-4 1 FUHL01-
(Large Arrow) FUHL54

1 The value nn should be set to the floor number plus 3 (floor 1 set to 4, floor 2 set to 5, floor 3 set to
6, ... floor 54 set to 57).

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 83 of 235

ELD Interface Board LED Definitions


There are five LEDs used to display various ELD information. The information they display is based on
the position of SW2-1. Status information is displayed when the switch is OPEN. Activity information
is displayed when the switch is CLOSED.

The tables below will refer to the LEDs as follows:

ELD Interface Board

¨ € € € € €
reset L1 L2 L3 L4 L5
button green red red red red

A.1. Status Mode Definitions

Status L1 L2 L3 L4 L5
Normal ON off ON off ON
(Alternates State) ON ON off ON off
RAM Test Fail ON off off ON off
RAM Download Fail ON off off ON ON
DRAM Test Fail ON off ON off off
UART Test Fail ON off ON off ON

A.2. Activity Mode Definitions

LED Activity State


L1 Power On ON Steady
L2 EMS Command Received Momentary Blink
L3 EMS Communication Error Continuous Blink
L4 RSL Communications Okay Continuous Blink
L5 ELD Software Operating Continuous Blink

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 84 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

Emergency Medical Operation (EMT)


Feature Description
Activation of the emergency medical hall switch, activates the in-car buzzer and illuminates a lamp in the
car and hall. This forces the car to cancel car calls, reassign hall calls, and return non-stop to the define
medical landing. Upon arrival, the doors open and the buzzer is deactivated.
The door remains open until the switch is turned off and the doors have been open for at least 60 seconds.
If the medical switch is toggled, this operation remains in effect for at least the 60 second delay. The
second phase of this operation can only be activated when the doors are open at the medical landing.
Once the car is on emergency medical operation, fire service operations can not be initiated, even though
the fire service lamp and buzzer are activated.
If the car is performing fire service operations, emergency medical operation can not be initiated, even
though the medical lamp and buzzer are activated.

Inputs and Outputs


Name I/O# I/O Link Description Active
EMKL 457 Output Car Emergency medical operation lamp -
EMT 1288 Input Hall Emergency medical operation switch L
EMTL 1315 Output Hall Emergency medical operation lamp -

Installation Parameters
Name Group Description Disable
EMT-P 6 Emergency medical operation return landing 255

Setup
The I/Os are all required to be addressed.
The EMT-P parameter needs to be defined.
· 1 to 64 = landing 1 to 64, open front door
· 101 to 164 = landing 1 to 64, open rear door
· 255 = disabled

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 85 of 235

Emergency Medical Car Operation (EMK)


Feature Description
The car automatically enters the emergency medical car operation after the doors are open at the medical
return landing. If the emergency medical car switch is not activated within 60 seconds, the medical
operation is canceled.
To move the car, the emergency medical car switch needs to be activated. Prior to activation, the door
can not be closed and car calls can not be registered. An active car switch allows car calls to be
registered, which automatically closes the door and moves the car to the target landing. At the target
landing the door opens and remains open until another car call is registered. The door close button has
no affect on this operation.
If the car medical switch is deactivated away from the medical return landing with the doors open, the car
remains at the landing not allowing calls or the door to be closed.
The car must be returned to the medical landing and the emergency medical car switch deactivated to
remove the car from emergency medical car operation.
Once the car is on emergency medical car operation, fire service operations can not be initiated, even
though the fire service lamp and buzzer are activated.

Inputs and Outputs


Name I/O# I/O Link Description Active
EMKH 354 Input Car Emergency medical car operation switch L
EMKL 457 Output Car Emergency medical operation lamp -
EMTL 1315 Output Hall Emergency medical operation lamp -

Installation Parameters
Name Group Description Disable
EMT-P 6 Emergency medical operation return landing 255

Setup
The I/Os are all required to be addressed.
The EMT-P parameter needs to be defined.
· 1 to 64 = landing 1 to 64, open front door
· 101 to 164 = landing 1 to 64, open rear door
· 255 = disabled

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 86 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

Emergency Power Operation: Automatic


Feature Description
Automatic Emergency Power Operation
For Automatic Emergency Power Operation, the AUTO position of the EPO strip switch must be in the
ON position. With this operation, each car is automatically rescued to the EPO return landing when the
system is on emergency power. The rescue operation gives preference to cars that are loaded over cars
that are empty in order to reduce entrapment times of passengers during this operation. Once each car
has returned to the EPO position, the doors will either remain opened indefinitely or for a predetermined
amount of time. When all cars have been successfully rescued, automatic selection of the car(s) to run on
normal operation shall occur. The priority of selection is as follows:
1) Car on SES Phase II
2) Car designated by contract parameter
3) First available car in group
Note that manual selection, of the car to rescue to the EPO position, takes priority over the automatic
selection sequence.

Inputs and Outputs


Name I/O# I/O Link Description Active
GNP2 356 Input Car Group Normal Power Input (Secondary feeder) L
GNP 359 Input Car Group Normal Power Input (Primary feeder) L
GBEP 360 Input Car Group EPO Input (Automatic Position) H
BEP 361 Input Car Building EPO Input (Manual Position) H
GT 431 Output Car Group Tie-in Relay (Intergroup only) -
GEPO 432 Input Car Enable Group EPO Rescue (Intergroup only) H
GEPN 433 Input Car Enable Group EPO Normal (Intergroup only) L
PSC 449 Input Car EPO Power Stable Condition H
PTC 469 Input Car Power Transfer Contact L
EPRL 1311 Output Hall EPO Return Lamp -
EPW 1313 Output Hall EPO Wait to Return Lamp -
SPL 2495 Output Group Group On Standby Power (EPO) Lamp -

Installation Parameters
Name Group Description Disable
EPO-P 6 EPO Return Landing 255
EPO-DC 6 EPO Door Close Time 0
EPCARS 6 Number of cars to run on EPO normal 1
SF_EPO 6 Split Feeder EPO 0
IGEPO 6 Enable Intergroup EPO 0
IGDSTM 6 Intergroup car deselect delay 0
EPCAR1 6 Priority Car 1 under EPO 255
EPCAR2 6 Priority Car 2 under EPO 255
EPMANC 6 EPO number of cars on manual operation 1
PWRXFR 6 Enable Power Transfer Operation 0
EPO-O 6 Emergency Power Options 0
EPRCR1 6 Emergency Power Rescue Car 1 255

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 87 of 235

Name Group Description Disable


EPRCR2 6 Emergency Power Rescue Car 2 255
EPRCR3 6 Emergency Power Rescue Car 3 255
EPRCR4 6 Emergency Power Rescue Car 4 255
EPRCR5 6 Emergency Power Rescue Car 5 255
EPRCR6 6 Emergency Power Rescue Car 6 255
EPRCR7 6 Emergency Power Rescue Car 7 255
EPRCR8 6 Emergency Power Rescue Car 8 255

Setup
The EPO-P installation parameter defines the EPO return landing. This is normally the same as the lobby
position.
· 1 to 64 = landing 1 to 64
· 255 = disabled
In some regions, the regional code may require the car doors to close after the car has returned to the
EPO-P position and discharged the passengers. The EPO-DC parameter is used to set the time before the
doors will close.
· 0 = the doors remain open indefinitely after the car rescues to the EPO-P position.
· 1 to 255 = the doors close after 1 to 255 seconds
The number of cars that can run simultaneously on normal operation under EPO can be defined, based on
the capacity of the building's emergency generator. The number of cars that can run simultaneously on
normal operation under EPO is defined by the EPCARS installation parameter.
· 1 to 8 = 1 to 8 cars
For Automatic Emergency Power Operation (using only one feeder), the SF_EPO installation parameter
is set to 0 and the GNP2 RSL input must be set to "01-0". Additionally, the IGEPO installation
parameter must be set to 0 in order to disable intergroup emergency power operation.
For selection of a specific car(s) to run on normal operation upon completion of the rescue operation, this
is accomplished by setting the EPCAR1/EPCAR2 installation parameters with the car ID.
· 1 to 8 = car ID 1 (A) to 8 (H)
For some regions, there may be a requirement to allow multiple cars to run on manual operation. If this
is the case, the EPMANC installation parameter must be set with the allowable number of cars that can
operate on manual operation. Otherwise, this parameter must be set to 1.
· 1 to 8 = 1 to 8 car running during emergency power operation
From the wiring diagrams, program the RSL input addresses for GNP, GBEP, and BEP. Since only one
feeder is required for the automatic emergency power operation, the GNP2 input must be set to "01-0".
The EPO-O options parameter provides various options for the emergency power operation.
· F bit = 0: keep the front doors closed at the rescue landing
· F bit = 1: open the front doors at the rescue landing
· R bit = 0: keep the rear doors closed at the rescue landing
· R bit = 1: open the rear doors at the rescue landing
· L bit = 0: car will rescue to the EPO-P position
· L bit = 1: car will rescue to the next commitable landing

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 88 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

Emergency Power Operation: Automatic Transfer


To/From Standby Power
Feature Description
Automatic Transfer To/From Standby Power
In buildings that have generators to provide electrical power for the elevator system during power failure
situations, an interface to switch power sources to the elevator system is required. This interface is
typically called a power transfer switch (PTS). Periodic tests may be required for buildings which
include switching power sources from normal power to standby power and from standby power to normal
power. In both cases, damage to the elevator equipment can occur if these transfers happen while
elevators are in motion due to either a phase mismatch or a power spike. With the increased technology
of automated power transfer switches, it is now possible to fully automate switching of power sources to
an elevator system under test conditions in the absence of maintenance personnel. This can increase the
potential for damage since the switching system has no indication that any elevators are in motion and
thus increase the risk in passenger entrapment.
When the transfer switch is activated, the elevator system will take advantage of the predetermined delay
from the power transfer switch by bringing any cars in motion to a stop to the nearest landing, open the
doors, and place the car in the Emergency Power Wait (EPW) operational mode. If any car is operating
under SES Phase I or II, the following special operation would apply:
A. If the car is in motion, the car shall be instructed to perform an emergency stop. Once the
car has stopped, the doors shall remain closed and the door open button rendered inoperative.
B. If the car is not in motion, the car will remain at its current position and the doors will either
remain closed if the current state is closed or opened if the current state is not
closed.
The above operation shall apply in both cases of power transfer, transferring to or from standby power.

Inputs and Outputs


Name I/O# I/O Link Description Active
GNP2 356 Input Car Group Normal Power Input (Secondary feeder) L
GNP 359 Input Car Group Normal Power Input (Primary feeder) L
GBEP 360 Input Car Group EPO Input (Automatic Position) H
BEP 361 Input Car Building EPO Input (Manual Position) H
GT 431 Output Car Group Tie-in Relay (Intergroup only) -
GEPO 432 Input Car Enable Group EPO Rescue (Intergroup only) H
GEPN 433 Input Car Enable Group EPO Normal (Intergroup only) L
PSC 449 Input Car EPO Power Stable Condition H
PTC 469 Input Car Power Transfer Contact L
EPRL 1311 Output Hall EPO Return Lamp -
EPW 1313 Output Hall EPO Wait to Return Lamp -
SPL 2495 Output Group Group On Standby Power (EPO) Lamp -

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 89 of 235

Installation Parameters
Name Group Description Disable
EPO-P 6 EPO Return Landing 255
EPO-DC 6 EPO Door Close Time 0
EPCARS 6 Number of cars to run on EPO normal 1
SF_EPO 6 Split Feeder EPO 0
IGEPO 6 Enable Intergroup EPO 0
IGDSTM 6 Intergroup car deselect delay 0
EPCAR1 6 Priority Car 1 under EPO 255
EPCAR2 6 Priority Car 2 under EPO 255
EPMANC 6 EPO number of cars on manual operation 1
PWRXFR 6 Enable Power Transfer Operation 0
EPO-O 6 Emergency Power Options 0
EPRCR1 6 Emergency Power Rescue Car 1 255
EPRCR2 6 Emergency Power Rescue Car 2 255
EPRCR3 6 Emergency Power Rescue Car 3 255
EPRCR4 6 Emergency Power Rescue Car 4 255
EPRCR5 6 Emergency Power Rescue Car 5 255
EPRCR6 6 Emergency Power Rescue Car 6 255
EPRCR7 6 Emergency Power Rescue Car 7 255
EPRCR8 6 Emergency Power Rescue Car 8 255

Setup
This feature monitors a signal from the power transfer switch which will indicate that a power transfer is
about to occur. A set of normally closed dry contacts will be provided to the elevator system from the
transfer switch, defined as the PTC input. The contacts will be closed in both the normal and standby
power conditions, and will be opened upon initiation of the power transfer and remain opened until the
transfer is complete. When the transfer is complete, the PTC contacts will return to the normally closed
position.
This feature can be used with any of the emergency power type operations (automatic, intergroup,split
feeder) by addressing the PTC input.
Additionally, the PWRXFR installation parameter must be set to 1.
The following illustration shows the states of the PTC and BNP inputs before and after the power
transfer.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 90 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

Transfer Transfer Transfer Transfer


Initiated Completed Initiated Completed
PTC

GNP

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 91 of 235

Emergency Power Operation: Discrete-Based


Feature Description
Discrete-Based Emergency Power Operation
For Discrete-Based Emergency Power Operation, each car in the group performs the emergency power
rescue operation and the selection of the normal car on emergency power based on a discrete input to the
individual car rather than messages sent out on the ring. This configuration allows a pre-determined
order of rescue and a designated car to run on normal operation by the wiring of relays which feed the
appropriate signals to the cars within the group.

Inputs and Outputs


Name I/O# I/O Link Description Active
GNP 359 Input Car Group Normal Power Input/Normal Utility L
GBEP 360 Input Car Group EPO Input/Enable Rescue Operation L
BEP 361 Input Car Building EPO Input/Enable Normal Operation L
NUG 476 Output Car Enable Car For Normal Operation on EPO -
NUSD 477 Output Car Enable Car For Rescue Operation on EPO -
PFLH 1299 Output Hall Power Failure Lamp -
EPWL 1300 Output Hall EPO Wait to Return Lamp -
EPRL 1311 Output Hall EPO Return Lamp -

Installation Parameters
Name Group Description Disable
EPO-P 6 EPO Return Landing 255
EPO-DC 6 EPO Door Close Time 0
EPO-O 6 Emergency Power Options 0

Setup
The EPO-P installation parameter defines the EPO return landing. This is normally the same as the lobby
position.
· 1 to 64 = landing 1 to 64
· 255 = disabled
In some regions, the regional code may require the car doors to close after the car has returned to the
EPO-P position and discharged the passengers. The EPO-DC parameter is used to set the time before the
doors will close.
· 0 = the doors remain open indefinitely after the car rescues to the EPO-P position.
· 1 to 255 = the doors close after 1 to 255 seconds

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 92 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

The EPO-O options parameter provides various options for the discrete-based emergency power
operation.
· F bit = 0: keep the front doors closed at the rescue landing
· F bit = 1: open the front doors at the rescue landing
· R bit = 0: keep the rear doors closed at the rescue landing
· R bit = 1: open the rear doors at the rescue landing
· L bit = 0: car will rescue to the EPO-P position
· L bit = 1: car will rescue to the next commitable landing
For the first car in the group to be rescued, the GNP and GBEP inputs must be addressed with the RSL
address for the GNP contact. The remaing cars in the group must have the GBEP inputs addressed based
on the desired order of rescue according to the hardware wiring configuration. The last car in the group
that is rescued will have its NUSD output wired such that it will select the desired car to run on normal
operation during emergency power. This output shall be wired into the car’s BEP input that is to run on
normal operation. The following diagram shows an example of how a typical discrete-based EPO
contract would be configured.

The NUG output is used to signal another car in the group to operate on normal operation if that car times
out while operating on normal during emergency power operation.

NOTE: The NUG and NUSD outputs MUST be addressed with a valid RSL address for discrete-based
emergency power operation. This is required in order to enable the discrete-based operation.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 93 of 235

GNP GNP GNP

Car A Car B Car C


GBEP GBEP GBEP
NUSD NUSD NUSD
BEP

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 94 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

Emergency Power Operation: Intergroup


Feature Description
Intergroup Emergency Power Operation
In Intergroup Emergency Power Operation, the emergency power supply can only power either a single
or predetermined number of cars within a specific group of elevators amongst several groups of elevators.
This requires additional intergroup connections so that each group can determine the running status of
cars within other groups.

Inputs and Outputs


Name I/O# I/O Link Description Active
GNP2 356 Input Car Group Normal Power Input (Secondary feeder) L
GNP 359 Input Car Group Normal Power Input (Primary feeder) L
GBEP 360 Input Car Group EPO Input (Automatic Position) H
BEP 361 Input Car Building EPO Input (Manual Position) H
GT 431 Output Car Group Tie-in Relay (Intergroup only) -
GEPO 432 Input Car Enable Group EPO Rescue (Intergroup only) H
GEPN 433 Input Car Enable Group EPO Normal (Intergroup only) L
PSC 449 Input Car EPO Power Stable Condition H
PTC 469 Input Car Power Transfer Contact L
EPRL 1311 Output Hall EPO Return Lamp -
EPW 1313 Output Hall EPO Wait to Return Lamp -
SPL 2495 Output Group Group On Standby Power (EPO) Lamp -

Installation Parameters
Name Group Description Disable
EPO-P 6 EPO Return Landing 255
EPO-DC 6 EPO Door Close Time 0
EPCARS 6 Number of cars to run on EPO normal 1
SF_EPO 6 Split Feeder EPO 0
IGEPO 6 Enable Intergroup EPO 0
IGDSTM 6 Intergroup car deselect delay 0
EPCAR1 6 Priority Car 1 under EPO 255
EPCAR2 6 Priority Car 2 under EPO 255
EPMANC 6 EPO number of cars on manual operation 1
PWRXFR 6 Enable Power Transfer Operation 0
EPO-O 6 Emergency Power Options 0
EPRCR1 6 Emergency Power Rescue Car 1 255
EPRCR2 6 Emergency Power Rescue Car 2 255
EPRCR3 6 Emergency Power Rescue Car 3 255
EPRCR4 6 Emergency Power Rescue Car 4 255
EPRCR5 6 Emergency Power Rescue Car 5 255
EPRCR6 6 Emergency Power Rescue Car 6 255
EPRCR7 6 Emergency Power Rescue Car 7 255
EPRCR8 6 Emergency Power Rescue Car 8 255

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 95 of 235

Setup
For intergroup emergency power operation, follow the same setup for the Automatic Emergency Power
Operation with the following exceptions:

· If intergroup emergency power operation is desired, the IGEPO installation parameter must
be set to "1" on all cars in the attached groups.

· The IGDSTM installation parameter must be set with a value representing the longest one
floor flight time among any of the cars in any of the groups that are tied together for
intergroup EPO. First, examine each car to determine the longest inter-floor distance (or
express zone, if any is present). Next, divide this value by the long run speed of the slowest
car in any of the interconnected groups. Add 5 to 10 additional seconds to cover acceleration
& deceleration delays, and the resulting value should be programmed into the IGDSTM
installation parameter in all of the cars.

· The GT RSL output must be addressed on all cars according to the wiring diagrams. The
GEPO input for the first group to be rescued must be addressed using the same RSL address
as the GNP RSL input so that the rescue operation will commence upon the detection of loss
of normal power. For subsequent groups, the GEPO RSL input should be addressed
according to the wiring diagrams. This input will be controlled by the previous group's GT
RSL output, which signals that the next group should initiate the rescue operation.

· The GEPN RSL input should also be addressed according to the wiring diagram. This input
will enable the desired group to run on EPO normal automatic selection operation. This
input will be controlled by the GT RSL output from the last group that has rescued. The
GEPN RSL input for all remaining groups must be programmed to "01-0" on all cars.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 96 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

Emergency Power Operation: Rescue Operation


Feature Description
Rescue Operation
For Automatic Emergency Power Operation, the order of the cars to be rescued can be predetermined in a
specific order for a group. This is accomplished by specifying the order of the cars to be rescued with the
installation parameters EPRCR1 - EPRCR8. If no specific order is defined, the default mode of selection
for emergency power rescue will be performed on the basis of the load state for each car. In other words,
cars with a greater load shall be rescued before cars which have smaller loads. This will reduce the
waiting times for passengers to be rescued particularly in the cases where there are empty elevators in a
group during an emergency power situation. In order to override the load-based rescue operation, the
installation parameters EPRCR1 - EPRCR8 must be setup accordingly.

Inputs and Outputs


Name I/O# I/O Link Description Active
GNP2 356 Input Car Group Normal Power Input (Secondary feeder) L
GNP 359 Input Car Group Normal Power Input (Primary feeder) L
GBEP 360 Input Car Group EPO Input (Automatic Position) H
BEP 361 Input Car Building EPO Input (Manual Position) H
GT 431 Output Car Group Tie-in Relay (Intergroup only) -
GEPO 432 Input Car Enable Group EPO Rescue (Intergroup only) H
GEPN 433 Input Car Enable Group EPO Normal (Intergroup only) L
PSC 449 Input Car EPO Power Stable Condition H
PTC 469 Input Car Power Transfer Contact L
EPRL 1311 Output Hall EPO Return Lamp -
EPW 1313 Output Hall EPO Wait to Return Lamp -
SPL 2495 Output Group Group On Standby Power (EPO) Lamp -

Installation Parameters
Name Group Description Disable
EPO-P 6 EPO Return Landing 255
EPO-DC 6 EPO Door Close Time 0
EPCARS 6 Number of cars to run on EPO normal 1
SF_EPO 6 Split Feeder EPO 0
IGEPO 6 Enable Intergroup EPO 0
IGDSTM 6 Intergroup car deselect delay 0
EPCAR1 6 Priority Car 1 under EPO 255
EPCAR2 6 Priority Car 2 under EPO 255
EPMANC 6 EPO number of cars on manual operation 1
PWRXFR 6 Enable Power Transfer Operation 0
EPO-O 6 Emergency Power Options 0
EPRCR1 6 Emergency Power Rescue Car 1 255
EPRCR2 6 Emergency Power Rescue Car 2 255
EPRCR3 6 Emergency Power Rescue Car 3 255
EPRCR4 6 Emergency Power Rescue Car 4 255
EPRCR5 6 Emergency Power Rescue Car 5 255

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 97 of 235

Name Group Description Disable


EPRCR6 6 Emergency Power Rescue Car 6 255
EPRCR7 6 Emergency Power Rescue Car 7 255
EPRCR8 6 Emergency Power Rescue Car 8 255

Setup
In order to designate the order of cars to be rescued during emergency power operation, the EPRCR1
installation parameter must be setup with the car ID (1-8) of the first car to be rescued followed by setting
up EPRCR2 with the second car to be rescued and so on for the remaining cars in the group. In order to
disable the designated order of rescue, the installation parameters EPRCR1 - EPRCR8 must be set to 255.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 98 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

Emergency Power Operation: Split Feeder


Feature Description
Split Feeder Operation
Split Feeder Operation is required when there are two main power feeders supplied for one group of
elevators. With split feeders, half of the group is set up on one feeder and the other half on the second
feeder. The operation is similar to the Automatic Emergency Power Operation except that the group is
configured to operate on two separate feeders for emergency power thus splitting the group into two
subgroups. If just one normal power feeder goes on emergency power and the other remains on normal
power, the cars assigned to the feeder that is on emergency power will perform the same operation as
described in the Automatic Emergency Power Operation. The remaining cars in the group assigned to
the feeder on normal power will continue to operate on normal operation. If the second feeder goes onto
emergency power, the entire group would perform the emergency power operation.

Inputs and Outputs


Name I/O# I/O Link Description Active
GNP2 356 Input Car Group Normal Power Input (Secondary feeder) L
GNP 359 Input Car Group Normal Power Input (Primary feeder) L
GBEP 360 Input Car Group EPO Input (Automatic Position) H
BEP 361 Input Car Building EPO Input (Manual Position) H
GT 431 Output Car Group Tie-in Relay (Intergroup only) -
GEPO 432 Input Car Enable Group EPO Rescue (Intergroup only) H
GEPN 433 Input Car Enable Group EPO Normal (Intergroup only) L
PSC 449 Input Car EPO Power Stable Condition H
PTC 469 Input Car Power Transfer Contact L
EPRL 1311 Output Hall EPO Return Lamp -
EPW 1313 Output Hall EPO Wait to Return Lamp -
SPL 2495 Output Group Group On Standby Power (EPO) Lamp -

Installation Parameters
Name Group Description Disable
EPO-P 6 EPO Return Landing 255
EPO-DC 6 EPO Door Close Time 0
EPCARS 6 Number of cars to run on EPO normal 1
SF_EPO 6 Split Feeder EPO 0
IGEPO 6 Enable Intergroup EPO 0
IGDSTM 6 Intergroup car deselect delay 0
EPCAR1 6 Priority Car 1 under EPO 255
EPCAR2 6 Priority Car 2 under EPO 255
EPMANC 6 EPO number of cars on manual operation 1
PWRXFR 6 Enable Power Transfer Operation 0
EPO-O 6 Emergency Power Options 0
EPRCR1 6 Emergency Power Rescue Car 1 255
EPRCR2 6 Emergency Power Rescue Car 2 255
EPRCR3 6 Emergency Power Rescue Car 3 255
EPRCR4 6 Emergency Power Rescue Car 4 255

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 99 of 235

Name Group Description Disable


EPRCR5 6 Emergency Power Rescue Car 5 255
EPRCR6 6 Emergency Power Rescue Car 6 255
EPRCR7 6 Emergency Power Rescue Car 7 255
EPRCR8 6 Emergency Power Rescue Car 8 255

Setup
For split feeder emergency power operation, follow the same setup for the Automatic Emergency Power
Operation with the following exceptions:
· The SF_EPO installation parameter must be set to indicate which feeder each car's
emergency power will be supplied on. For cars to be supplied on feeder #1, SF_EPO must be
set to "1". For cars to be supplied on feeder #2, SF_EPO must be set to "2".

· The GNP RSL input for each car in the group must be addressed with the address of the
contacts for feeder #1. The GNP2 RSL input for each car in the group must be addressed
with the address of the contacts for feeder #2. For example, if a six car group is configured
for split feeder EPO with the odd number cars on feeder #1 and the even number cars on
feeder #2, the GNP RSL input for all cars would be addressed for feeder #1 and the GNP2
RSL input would be addressed for feeder #2. The following diagram illustrates which RSL
inputs are addressed to feeder #1 and #2 from the above example.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 100 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

Feeder Feeder
1 2

GNP GNP

GNP2 GNP2

CAR 1 CAR 2

GNP GNP

GNP2 GNP2

CAR 3 CAR 4

GNP GNP

GNP2 GNP2

CAR 5 CAR 6

Cars 1,3, and 5 - Feeder #1, SF_EPO = 1 Cars 2,4, and 6 - Feeder #2, SF_EPO = 2

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 101 of 235

Emergency Power Operation: Transfer to Normal


Feature Description
Transfer to Normal Power from Emergency Power Operation
With some contracts, there may be a requirement to have a means to stop any car(s) running on
emergency power to come to a stop in anticipation of transferring back to normal power. In order to do
so, a signal must be provided to OCSS to indicate that a power transfer from emergency power to normal
power is going to occur after a predetermined time once this signal is activated. Upon activation of this
signal, any car(s) that are in motion will be instructed to stop at it's next commitable landing and open its
doors whereupon all cars will remain at their stopped positions until normal power has been restored.

Inputs and Outputs


Name I/O# I/O Link Description Active
GNP2 356 Input Car Group Normal Power Input (Secondary feeder) L
GNP 359 Input Car Group Normal Power Input (Primary feeder) L
GBEP 360 Input Car Group EPO Input (Automatic Position) H
BEP 361 Input Car Building EPO Input (Manual Position) H
GT 431 Output Car Group Tie-in Relay (Intergroup only) -
GEPO 432 Input Car Enable Group EPO Rescue (Intergroup only) H
GEPN 433 Input Car Enable Group EPO Normal (Intergroup only) L
PSC 449 Input Car EPO Power Stable Condition H
PTC 469 Input Car Power Transfer Contact L
EPRL 1311 Output Hall EPO Return Lamp -
EPW 1313 Output Hall EPO Wait to Return Lamp -
SPL 2495 Output Group Group On Standby Power (EPO) Lamp -

Installation Parameters
Name Group Description Disable
EPO-P 6 EPO Return Landing 255
EPO-DC 6 EPO Door Close Time 0
EPCARS 6 Number of cars to run on EPO normal 1
SF_EPO 6 Split Feeder EPO 0
IGEPO 6 Enable Intergroup EPO 0
IGDSTM 6 Intergroup car deselect delay 0
EPCAR1 6 Priority Car 1 under EPO 255
EPCAR2 6 Priority Car 2 under EPO 255
EPMANC 6 EPO number of cars on manual operation 1
PWRXFR 6 Enable Power Transfer Operation 0
EPO-O 6 Emergency Power Options 0
EPRCR1 6 Emergency Power Rescue Car 1 255
EPRCR2 6 Emergency Power Rescue Car 2 255
EPRCR3 6 Emergency Power Rescue Car 3 255
EPRCR4 6 Emergency Power Rescue Car 4 255
EPRCR5 6 Emergency Power Rescue Car 5 255
EPRCR6 6 Emergency Power Rescue Car 6 255
EPRCR7 6 Emergency Power Rescue Car 7 255

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 102 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

Name Group Description Disable


EPRCR8 6 Emergency Power Rescue Car 8 255

Setup
This feature can be used with any of the emergency power type operations (automatic, intergroup,split
feeder) by simply addressing the PSC RSL input with the proper address of the signal provided to the
elevator system indicating that a transfer to normal power is going to occur within a predetermined time.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 103 of 235

Emergency Service Protection Operation (EFP)


Feature Description
Emergency service protection operation is used in conjunction with fire service and emergency medical
operations. If the car is in EFS or EMK mode, a power failure occurs or the next commitable landing is
invalid, emergency service protection operation is entered. The car remains as is until the door close
button is pressed signaling the car is allowed to perform a correction run.
If the car is unsafe to move, the car remains as is regardless of the door close button status.

Inputs and Outputs


Name I/O# I/O Link Description Active
DCB 381 Input Car Front door close button H
RDCB 403 Input Car Rear door close button H

Installation Parameters
None.

Setup
The door close buttons need to be addressed.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 104 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

Emergency Stop Operation (ESB)


Feature Description
Emergency stop operation is performed when MCSS commands the car to stop immediately.
If the car is at a landing, the door opens unless fully closed prior to the emergency stop. The door open
buttons are allowed.

Inputs and Outputs


None.

Installation Parameters
Name Group Description Disable
ESB-XHC 5 Enable hall call cancellation during ESB mode N/A

Setup
Hall call cancellation is now selectable through the ESB-XHC parameter:
· 0 - 254 = Hall calls are not assigned to this car after 0 to 254 seconds. A simplex car will
have the hall calls deleted after the timeout period.
· 255 = Hall calls are allowed to be globally assigned. A simplex car will not have the hall
calls deleted.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 105 of 235

EMS Related Features


Feature Description
The Elevator Monitoring System (EMS) can send certain information, dependent upon it's version and
configuration. The OCSS can override some of these messages.

Inputs and Outputs


None.

Installation Parameters
Name Group Description Disable
EMS-XC 7 EMS security options flag N/A
EMS-O 1 EMS Options 0

Setup
The EMS-XC bitmask parameter defines options for EMS security:
When EMS security is acvtivated, the existing calls assigned to a car at the secured landings
may want be deleted immediately. If the calls are not to be deleted immediately, then security
at landings with demand is preempted until all calls have been answered at that landing. This
option is defined by the D bit:
D bit = 0: Allow calls to remain upon activation of security
D bit = 1: Delete calls upon activation of security
It may be desired to have EMS security overridden by a car on Independent Service mode. This
option is defined by the I bit:
I bit = 0: Disable ISC override of EMS security
I bit = 1: Enable ISC override of EMS security
The EMS-O parameter specified various EMS options. Systems with EMS v2.0 or lower must have
parameter passing disabled. Systems with an EMS configured as ICD 4.1 or lower must have the L bit
set to 0.
P bit = 0: disable EMS parameter passing
P bit = 1: enable EMS parameter passing
L bit = 0: transmit OCSS load states using ICD 4.1 or lower
L bit = 1: transmit OCSS load states using ICD 4.2 or higher

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 106 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

Express Zones
Feature Description
An express zone is defined when all the cars in the group do not serve a defined number of landings.
Usually, these landings are served by a different bank of elevators. Up to three express zones per rise are
supported.

Inputs and Outputs


None.

Installation Parameters
Name Group Description Disable
EZ-LFT 8 Left position indicator digit for an express zone N/A
EZ-RGT 8 Right position indicator digit for an express zone N/A
EZ1BOT 2 Express zone 1, bottom landing 255
EZ1TOP 2 Express zone 1, top landing 255
EZ1RSR 2 Express zone 1 RSR penalty 0
EZ1DLY 2 Express zone 1, lantern delay 0
EZ2BOT 2 Express zone 2, bottom landing 255
EZ2TOP 2 Express zone 2, top landing 255
EZ2RSR 2 Express zone 2 RSR penalty 0
EZ2DLY 2 Express zone 2, lantern delay 0
EZ3BOT 2 Express zone 3, bottom landing 255
EZ3TOP 2 Express zone 3, top landing 255
EZ3RSR 2 Express zone 3 RSR penalty 0
EZ3DLY 2 Express zone 3, lantern delay 0

Setup
The EZ-LFT and EZ-RGT parameters define the digits displayed on the PI while the car is in an express
zone.
· 0 to 38 = Acceptable characters, refer to the Position Indicators chapter for definitions
The EZ1BOT, EZ2BOT, and EZ3BOT parameters define the bottom landing of each express zone.
· 1 to 64 = Landing 01 to 64
· 255 = Disabled
The EZ1TOP, EZ2TOP, and EZ3TOP parameters define the top landing of each express zone.
· 1 to 64 = Landing 01 to 64
· 255 = Disabled
The EZ1DLY, EZ2DLY, and EZ3DLY parameters define the activation delay of the hall lanterns
bounding the express zones.
· 0 = Disabled, hall lanterns activated half-way through the express zone
· 1 to 255 = 1 to 255 second lantern activation delay
The EZ1RSR, EZ2RSR, and EZ3RSR parameters define the number of seconds it takes to travel through
the defined express zone.
· 0 to 255 = 0 to 255 seconds

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 107 of 235

Field Engineering Spares


Feature Description
The listed I/O and parameters are reserved for field engineering use.

Inputs and Outputs


Name I/O# I/O Link Description Active
FESP1C 349 Either Car Field engineering spare I/O -
FESP2C 350 Either Car Field engineering spare I/O -
FESP3C 351 Either Car Field engineering spare I/O -
FESP4C 352 Either Car Field engineering spare I/O -
FESP5C 353 Either Car Field engineering spare I/O -
FESP1H 1340 Either Hall Field engineering spare I/O -
FESP2H 1341 Either Hall Field engineering spare I/O (Reserved) -
FESP3H 1342 Either Hall Field engineering spare I/O -
FESP4H 1343 Either Hall Field engineering spare I/O -
FESP1G 2505 Either Group Field engineering spare I/O -
FESP2G 2506 Either Group Field engineering spare I/O -
FESP3G 2507 Either Group Field engineering spare I/O -
FESP4G 2508 Either Group Field engineering spare I/O -
FESP5G 2509 Either Group Field engineering spare I/O -

Installation Parameters
Name Group Description Disable
FIELD1 1 Field engineering spare parameter N/A
FIELD2 1 Field engineering spare parameter N/A
FIELD3 1 Field engineering spare parameter N/A
FIELD4 1 Field engineering spare parameter N/A
FIELD5 1 Field engineering spare parameter N/A
FIELD6 1 Field engineering spare parameter N/A
FIELD7 1 Field engineering spare parameter N/A

Setup
The FESP2H input is used to determine whether or not the arrow is displayed during channeling
operation.
Refer to the Up-peak: Channeling Operation chapter for more information.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 108 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

Fire Proof Doors (FPD)


Feature Description
In order to protect the building against the spread of fire, fire proof shutter doors are provided at each
landing. The shutter doors are held open with magnets which let the doors close when the smoke
detector sounds at that particular landing. Fire proof doors are not located at the fire return landings.

Inputs and Outputs


Name I/O# I/O Link Description Active
FPD01-80 641 - Input Car Fire Proof Door input; landing 01 - 80 L
720
FPDL 1323 Output Hall Fire Proof Door active lamp -

Installation Parameters
Name Group Description Disable
EN-FPD 6 Enable Fire Proof Doors 0

Setup
The Fire Proof Door input at each landing must be addressed.
The FPDL output must be addressed to signal at least 1 FPD input is active.
The EN-FPD parameter enables the Fire Proof Doors feature.
· 0 = Fire Proof Doors disabled
· 1 = Fire Proof Doors enabled

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 109 of 235

Fire Service Operation, PhaseI (EFO)


Feature Description
Fire service operation is carried out using two operations, recall to a landing (phaseI) and car operation
(phaseII). Many fire service codes are supported.
Recall to a landing is actuated via smoke sensors and switches. During fire service phaseI operation, the
car is returned non-stop to a pre-defined landing and taken out of service. PhaseI operation is in
compliance with local, state and national codes.
In addition to the recall operation, phaseI operation contains a bypass feature. When the operation is in
bypass, certain smoke sensors are ignored. This allows the elevators to operate normally while the smoke
sensors are manually being reset.

Inputs and Outputs


Name I/O# I/O Link Description Active
EFK 338 Input Car Fire service hall switch, ON position *
EFO 339 Input Car Others smoke sensor L
ASL 340 Input Car Main landing smoke sensor L
EFKB 341 Input Car Fire service hall switch, BYPASS position *
ASL2 344 Input Car Alternate landing smoke sensor L
REFK 345 Input Car Remote fire service hall switch, ON position *
BUZ 376 Output Car Buzzer in the car operating panel -
FSL 387 Output Car Fire service lamp in the car operating panel -
RFSL 416 Output Car Rear fire service lamp in the car operating panel -
REFKB 429 Input Car Remote fire service hall switch, BYPASS *
position
MREFO 458 Input Car Machine room smoke sensor L
BYPASS 729 Input Car Stand-alone Bypass switch H
DDSR1 731 Output Car Disable Door Switch Relay -
DDSR2 732 Output Car Disable Door Switch Relay -
DEECR 733 Output Car Disable Emergency Exit Contact Relay -
DESBR 734 Output Car Disable Emergency Stop Button Relay -
DSGSR 735 Output Car Disable Safety Gate Shoe Relay -
HDOB 1314 Input Hall Hall door open button H
FSR 2494 Output Group Fire Service Lamp, Group Link -
GFSL1-60 2564- Output Group Group Fire Service Lamp 1 - 60 -
2623
FSBPL1 2498 Output Group Fire service switch BYPASS lamp -
FSBPL2 2501 Output Group Remote fire service switch BYPASS lamp -
FKL1 2502 Output Group Fire service switch ON lamp -
FKL2 2503 Output Group Remote fire service switch ON lamp -
* The FSKTYP parameter defines the fire service switch polarity

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 110 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

Installation Parameters
Name Group Description Disable
EFS 6 Fire service operation code compliance N/A
EFS-CK 6 Fire service operation code compliance check N/A
EFO-P 6 Main SES recall landing N/A
EFO-CK 6 Main SES recall landing check N/A
ASL-P 6 Alternate SES recall landing N/A
ASL-CK 6 Alternate SES recall landing check N/A
ASL2-P 6 Second alternate SES recall landing 255
ASL2-C 6 Second alternate SES recall landing check 255
EFO-DC 6 Fire service door open time 0
FSKTYP 6 Fire service switch types N/A
SMKTYP 6 Fire service smoke sensor types N/A
SES-O 6 Fire service options bitmask N/A
SESOVR 6 Fire service PhaseI override delay N/A

Setup
There are many different fire service operations to satisfy the many code variants. Not all of the inputs,
outputs and installation parameters are used by each code. This description is designed to give the proper
setup instruction with respect to the code variants supported.
SES PhaseI installation parameter values
The EFS and EFS-CK parameters define the fire code operation. If these two parameters do not match,
the car is placed in not available operation and the event code 802 is logged.
0 = Reserved 1 = Automatic SES
2 = Manual SES 3 = ANSI 1987 SES
4 = British SES 5 = Reserved
6 = Chicago 1994 7 = Canadian SES
8 = California SES 9 = New York City SES
10 = Chicago SES 11 = Hawaiian SES
12 = Detroit SES 13 = ANSI 1989 SES
14 = Canadian 1990 SES 15 = New York City 1993 SES
16 = Mass/ANSI 1993 SES 17 = Australian SES
18 = Singapore SES 19 = Hong Kong SES
20 = Taiwan SES 21 = New Zealand SES
The EFO-P and EFO-CK parameters define the main SES recall landing. If these two parameters do not
match, the car is placed in not available operation and the event code 800 is logged.
1 to 64 = Landing 1 to 64, opens front door
101 to 164 = Landing 1 to 64, opens rear door
201 to 254 = Landing 1 to 54, opens both doors
The ASL-P and ASL-CK parameters define the alternate SES recall landing. If these two parameters do
not match, the car is placed in not available operation and the event code 801 is logged.
1 to 64 = Landing 1 to 64, opens front door
101 to 164 = Landing 1 to 64, opens rear door
201 to 254 = Landing 1 to 54, opens both doors
The ASL2-P and ASL2-C parameters define the second alternate SES recall landing. If these two
parameters do not match, the car is placed in not available operation and the event code 803 is logged.
1 to 64 = Landing 1 to 64, opens front door
101 to 164 = Landing 1 to 64, opens rear door
201 to 254 = Landing 1 to 54, opens both doors

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 111 of 235

The EFO-DC parameter defines the delay in seconds to have the doors close at the designated SES recall
landing.
0 = Disabled
1 to 255 = 1 to 255 seconds
The FSKTYP parameter defines the fire service input active states.
0 = Active high PhaseI switch and active high PhaseII switch
1 = Active high PhaseI switch and active low PhaseII switch
2 = Active low PhaseI switch and active low PhaseII switch
3 = Active low PhaseI switch and active high PhaseII switch

Table: Old switch logic vs. New switch logic


Old Switch EFK input EFKB input New Switch EFK input EFKB input
BYPASS L L ON L L
OFF L H ON L H
ON H L OFF H L
ON H H BYPASS H H

Old Switch REFK input REFKB input New Switch REFK input REFKB input
BYPASS L L ON L L
OFF L H ON L H
ON H L OFF H L
ON H H BYPASS H H

The SMKTYP parameter defines the fire service smoke sensor active states.
E bit = 0: Building smoke sensor is active low
E bit = 1: Building smoke sensor is active high
1 bit = 0: Main landing smoke sensor is active low
1 bit = 1: Main landing smoke sensor is active high
2 bit = 0: Alternate landing smoke sensor is active low
2 bit = 1: Alternate landing smoke sensor is active high
M bit = 0: Machine room smoke sensor is active low
M bit = 1: Machine room smoke sensor is active high
The SES-O parameter defines fire service options.
1 bit = 0: The emergency stop input is ignored during SES PhaseI
1 bit = 1: The emergency stop input is allowed during SES PhaseI
2 bit = 0: The emergency stop input is ignored during SES PhaseII
2 bit = 1: The emergency stop input is allowed during SES PhaseII
L bit = 0: Disable software latching of all SES PhaseI inputs
L bit = 1: Enable software latching of all SES PhaseI inputs
The SESOVR parameter defines the delay in seconds to have the car override ATT, ISC or EHS to
perform a return to the designated SES recall landing.
0 to 255 = 0 to 255 seconds

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 112 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

SES PhaseI outputs


These generic SES PhaseI operation outputs are activated as follows:
· BUZ: During phaseI operation recall.
· FSL: During phaseI operation or a phaseI input is active.
· RFSL: During phaseI operation or a phaseI input is active.
· FSR: During phaseI operation or a phaseI input is active.
· FKBPL1: At least one switch is in the BYPASS position.
· FKBPL2: At least one switch is in the BYPASS position.
· FKL1: At least one switch is in the ON position.
· FKL2: At least one switch is in the ON position.
The GFSL1-GFSL60 outputs should be used for jobs with a fire service lamp at every landing. These
outputs are designed to distribute the current load on the group link by spacing the activation of the
lamps.
The GFSL1-GFSL60 outputs are grouped into ten sets of lamps. Each set of lamps contains six GFSL
outputs which are ten I/O numbers apart. For example, the first set of lamps contains GFSL1, GFSL11,
GFSL21, GFSL31, GFSL41, and GFSL51. The second set of lamps contains GFSL2, GFSL12, GFSL22,
GFSL32, GFSL42, and GFSL52. The tenth set of lamps contains GFSL10, GFSL20, GFSL30, GFSL40,
GFSL50, and GFSL60.
The ten set of lamps are activated 100 milli-seconds apart from each other and flash every 500 milli-
seconds. If sequential RSL addresses are stored in the GFSL outputs, the six lamps in a set should
activate about 10 milli-seconds apart from each other.
Each fire code region should determine which outputs are required and address them accordingly.
ANSI 1987 SES PhaseI Setup
1. The EFS and EFS-CK parameters must be equal to 3.
2. The EFO-P and EFO-CK parameters must be defined to the door and landing associated with
the main SES recall landing.
3. The ASL-P and ASL-CK parameters must be defined to the door and landing associated with
the alternate SES recall landing.
4. If the doors are to close at the designated SES recall landing after a timeout period, then the
EFO-DC parameter must be defined to the delay time in seconds. Note that in order to
reopen the doors, the input HDOB must be used.
5. The FSKTYP parameter must define the active states of the SES PhaseI and PhaseII switches.
6. The ASL2-P, ASL2-C, SMKTYP, SES-O, and SESOVR parameters are not used by this
region and should be defaulted inactive.
7. The following inputs must be addressed: EFK, EFKB, EFO, and ASL.

ANSI 1989 SES PhaseI Setup


1. The EFS and EFS-CK parameters must be equal to 13.
2. The EFO-P and EFO-CK parameters must be defined to the door and landing associated with
the main SES recall landing.
3. The ASL-P and ASL-CK parameters must be defined to the door and landing associated with
the alternate SES recall landing.
4. If the doors are to close at the designated SES recall landing after a timeout period, then the
EFO-DC parameter must be defined to the delay time in seconds. Note that in order to
reopen the doors, the input HDOB must be used.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 113 of 235

5. The FSKTYP parameter must define the active states of the SES PhaseI and PhaseII switches.
6. The ASL2-P, ASL2-C, SMKTYP, SES-O, and SESOVR parameters are not used by this
region and should be defaulted inactive.
7. The following inputs must be addressed: EFK, EFKB, REFK, REFKB, EFO, and ASL.
Australian SES PhaseI Setup
1. The EFS and EFS-CK parameters must be equal to 17.
2. The EFO-P and EFO-CK parameters must be defined to the door and landing associated with
the main SES recall landing.
3. The ASL-P and ASL-CK parameters must be defined to the door and landing associated with
the alternate SES recall landing.
4. If the doors are to close at the designated SES recall landing after a timeout period, then the
EFO-DC parameter must be defined to the delay time in seconds. Note that in order to
reopen the doors, the input HDOB must be used.
5. The FSKTYP parameter must define the active states of the SES PhaseI and PhaseII switches.
6. The SMKTYP bitmask parameter describes the active states of the SES smoke sensors:
An active low building smoke sensor must be used by setting the ‘E’ bit to 0.
An active low main landing sensor must be used by setting the ‘1’ bit to 0.
7. The ASL2-P, ASL2-C, SES-O, and SESOVR parameters are not used by this region and
should be defaulted inactive.
8. The following inputs must be addressed: EFK and ASL.
Automatic SES PhaseI Setup
1. The EFS and EFS-CK parameters must be equal to 1.
2. The EFO-P and EFO-CK parameters must be defined to the door and landing associated with
the main SES recall landing.
3. The ASL-P and ASL-CK parameters must be defined to the door and landing associated with
the alternate SES recall landing.
4. If the doors are to close at the designated SES recall landing after a timeout period, then the
EFO-DC parameter must be defined to the delay time in seconds. Note that in order to
reopen the doors, the input HDOB must be used.
5. The FSKTYP parameter must define the active states of the SES PhaseI and PhaseII switches.
6. The SMKTYP bitmask parameter describes the active states of the SES smoke sensors:
An active low building smoke sensor must be used by setting the ‘E’ bit to 0.
An active low main landing sensor must be used by setting the ‘1’ bit to 0.
7. The SES-O bitmask parameter describes when the car is allowed to ignore the in-car
emergency stop input.
To ignore the in-car emergency stop, the ‘1’ bit is set to 0.
To allow the in-car emergency stop, the ‘1’ bit is set to 1.
The ‘2’ bit is defined by SES PhaseII
The ‘L’ bit is not used by this region.
8. The ASL2-P, ASL2-C, and SESOVR parameters are not used by this region and should be
defaulted inactive.
9. The following inputs must be addressed: EFK, EFKB, EFO, and ASL.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 114 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

British SES PhaseI Setup


1. The EFS and EFS-CK parameters must be equal to 8.
2. The EFO-P and EFO-CK parameters must be defined to the door and landing associated with
the main SES recall landing.
3. The ASL-P and ASL-CK parameters must be defined to the door and landing associated with
the alternate SES recall landing.
4. If the doors are to close at the designated SES recall landing after a timeout period, then the
EFO-DC parameter must be defined to the delay time in seconds. Note that in order to
reopen the doors, the input HDOB must be used.
5. The FSKTYP parameter must define the active states of the SES PhaseI and PhaseII switches.
6. The SMKTYP bitmask parameter describes the active states of the SES smoke sensors:
An active low building smoke sensor must be used by setting the ‘E’ bit to 0.
An active low main landing sensor must be used by setting the ‘1’ bit to 0.
7. The SES-O bitmask parameter describes when the car is allowed to ignore the in-car
emergency stop input.
To ignore the in-car emergency stop, the ‘1’ bit is set to 0.
To allow the in-car emergency stop, the ‘1’ bit is set to 1.
The ‘2’ bit is defined by SES PhaseII
The ‘L’ bit is not used by this region.
8. The ASL2-P, ASL2-C, and SESOVR parameters are not used by this region and should be
defaulted inactive.
9. The following inputs must be addressed: EFK, EFO, and ASL.
California SES PhaseI Setup
1. The EFS and EFS-CK parameters must be equal to 8.
2. The EFO-P and EFO-CK parameters must be defined to the door and landing associated with
the main SES recall landing.
3. The ASL-P and ASL-CK parameters must be defined to the door and landing associated with
the alternate SES recall landing.
4. If the doors are to close at the designated SES recall landing after a timeout period, then the
EFO-DC parameter must be defined to the delay time in seconds. Note that in order to
reopen the doors, the input HDOB must be used.
5. The FSKTYP parameter must define the active states of the SES PhaseI and PhaseII switches.
6. The ASL2-P, ASL2-C, SMKTYP, SES-O, and SESOVR parameters are not used by this
region and should be defaulted inactive.
7. The following inputs must be addressed: EFK, EFKB, EFO, and ASL.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 115 of 235

Canadian SES PhaseI Setup


1. The EFS and EFS-CK parameters must be equal to 7.
2. The EFO-P and EFO-CK parameters must be defined to the door and landing associated with
the main SES recall landing.
3. The ASL-P and ASL-CK parameters must be defined to the door and landing associated with
the alternate SES recall landing.
4. If the doors are to close at the designated SES recall landing after a timeout period, then the
EFO-DC parameter must be defined to the delay time in seconds. Note that in order to
reopen the doors, the input HDOB must be used.
5. The FSKTYP parameter must define the active states of the SES PhaseI and PhaseII switches.
6. The ASL2-P, ASL2-C, SMKTYP, SES-O, and SESOVR parameters are not used by this
region and should be defaulted inactive.
7. The following inputs must be addressed: EFK, EFKB, EFO, and ASL.
Canadian 1990 SES PhaseI Setup
1. The EFS and EFS-CK parameters must be equal to 14.
2. The EFO-P and EFO-CK parameters must be defined to the door and landing associated with
the main SES recall landing.
3. The ASL-P and ASL-CK parameters must be defined to the door and landing associated with
the alternate SES recall landing.
4. If the doors are to close at the designated SES recall landing after a timeout period, then the
EFO-DC parameter must be defined to the delay time in seconds. Note that in order to
reopen the doors, the input HDOB must be used.
5. The FSKTYP parameter must define the active states of the SES PhaseI and PhaseII switches.
6. The ASL2-P, ASL2-C, SMKTYP, SES-O, and SESOVR parameters are not used by this
region and should be defaulted inactive.
7. The following inputs must be addressed: EFK, EFKB, REFK, REFKB, EFO, MREFO and
ASL.
Chicago SES PhaseI Setup
1. The EFS and EFS-CK parameters must be equal to 10.
2. The EFO-P and EFO-CK parameters must be defined to the door and landing associated with
the main SES recall landing.
3. The ASL-P and ASL-CK parameters must be defined to the door and landing associated with
the alternate SES recall landing.
4. If the doors are to close at the designated SES recall landing after a timeout period, then the
EFO-DC parameter must be defined to the delay time in seconds. Note that in order to
reopen the doors, the input HDOB must be used.
5. The FSKTYP parameter must define the active states of the SES PhaseI and PhaseII switches.
6. The ASL2-P, ASL2-C, SMKTYP, SES-O, and SESOVR parameters are not used by this
region and should be defaulted inactive.
7. The following inputs must be addressed: EFK, EFO, and ASL.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 116 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

Chicago 1994 SES PhaseI Setup


1. The EFS and EFS-CK parameters must be equal to 06.
2. The EFO-P and EFO-CK parameters must be defined to the door and landing associated with
the main SES recall landing.
3. The ASL-P and ASL-CK parameters must be defined to the door and landing associated with
the alternate SES recall landing.
4. If the doors are to close at the designated SES recall landing after a timeout period, then the
EFO-DC parameter must be defined to the delay time in seconds. Note that in order to
reopen the doors, the input HDOB must be used.
5. The FSKTYP parameter must define the active states of the SES PhaseI and PhaseII switches.
6. The ASL2-P, ASL2-C, SMKTYP, SES-O, and SESOVR parameters are not used by this
region and should be defaulted inactive.
7. The following inputs must be addressed: EFK, EFO, and ASL.
Detroit SES PhaseI Setup
1. The EFS and EFS-CK parameters must be equal to 12.
2. The EFO-P and EFO-CK parameters must be defined to the door and landing associated with
the main SES recall landing.
3. The ASL-P and ASL-CK parameters must be defined to the door and landing associated with
the alternate SES recall landing.
4. The ASL2-P and ASL2-CK parameters must be defined to the door and landing associated
with the second alternate SES recall landing.
5. If the doors are to close at the designated SES recall landing after a timeout period, then the
EFO-DC parameter must be defined to the delay time in seconds. Note that in order to
reopen the doors, the input HDOB must be used.
6. The FSKTYP parameter must define the active states of the SES PhaseI and PhaseII switches.
7. The SMKTYP, SES-O and SESOVR parameters are not used by this region and should be
defaulted inactive.
8. The following inputs must be addressed: EFK, EFKB, EFO, ASL, and ASL2.
Hawaiian SES PhaseI Setup
1. The EFS and EFS-CK parameters must be equal to 11.
2. The EFO-P and EFO-CK parameters must be defined to the door and landing associated with
the main SES recall landing.
3. The ASL-P and ASL-CK parameters must be defined to the door and landing associated with
the alternate SES recall landing.
4. If the doors are to close at the designated SES recall landing after a timeout period, then the
EFO-DC parameter must be defined to the delay time in seconds. Note that in order to
reopen the doors, the input HDOB must be used.
5. The FSKTYP parameter must define the active states of the SES PhaseI and PhaseII switches.
6. The ASL2-P, ASL2-C, SMKTYP, SES-O, and SESOVR parameters are not used by this
region and should be defaulted inactive.
7. The following inputs must be addressed: EFK, EFKB, EFO, and ASL.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 117 of 235

Hong Kong SES PhaseI Setup


1. The EFS and EFS-CK parameters must be equal to 19.
2. The EFO-P and EFO-CK parameters must be defined to the door and landing associated with
the main SES recall landing.
3. The ASL-P and ASL-CK parameters must be defined to the door and landing associated with
the alternate SES recall landing.
4. If the doors are to close at the designated SES recall landing after a timeout period, then the
EFO-DC parameter must be defined to the delay time in seconds. Note that in order to
reopen the doors, the input HDOB must be used.
5. The FSKTYP parameter must define the active states of the SES PhaseI and PhaseII switches.
6. The SMKTYP bitmask parameter describes the active states of the SES smoke sensors:
An active low main landing sensor must be used by setting the ‘1’ bit to 0.
7. The ASL2-P, ASL2-C, SES-O, and SESOVR parameters are not used by this region and
should be defaulted inactive.
8. The following inputs must be addressed: EFK and ASL.
Manual SES PhaseI Setup
1. The EFS and EFS-CK parameters must be equal to 2.
2. The EFO-P and EFO-CK parameters must be defined to the door and landing associated with
the main SES recall landing.
3. The ASL-P and ASL-CK parameters must be defined to the door and landing associated with
the alternate SES recall landing.
4. If the doors are to close at the designated SES recall landing after a timeout period, then the
EFO-DC parameter must be defined to the delay time in seconds. Note that in order to
reopen the doors, the input HDOB must be used.
5. The FSKTYP parameter must define the active states of the SES PhaseI and PhaseII switches.
6. The SMKTYP bitmask parameter describes the active states of the SES smoke sensors:
An active low building smoke sensor must be used by setting the ‘E’ bit to 0.
An active low main landing sensor must be used by setting the ‘1’ bit to 0.
7. The SES-O bitmask parameter describes when the car is allowed to ignore the in-car
emergency stop input.
To ignore the in-car emergency stop, the ‘1’ bit is set to 0.
To allow the in-car emergency stop, the ‘1’ bit is set to 1.
The ‘2’ bit is defined by SES PhaseII
The ‘L’ bit is not used by this region.
8. The ASL2-P, ASL2-C, and SESOVR parameters are not used by this region and should be
defaulted inactive.
9. The following inputs must be addressed: EFK, EFKB, EFO, and ASL.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 118 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

Massachusetts/ANSI 1993 SES PhaseI Setup


1. The EFS and EFS-CK parameters must be equal to 16.
2. The EFO-P and EFO-CK parameters must be defined to the door and landing associated with
the main SES recall landing.
3. The ASL-P and ASL-CK parameters must be defined to the door and landing associated with
the alternate SES recall landing.
4. If the doors are to close at the designated SES recall landing after a timeout period, then the
EFO-DC parameter must be defined to the delay time in seconds. Note that in order to
reopen the doors, the input HDOB must be used.
5. The FSKTYP parameter must define the active states of the SES PhaseI and PhaseII switches.
6. The ASL2-P, ASL2-C, SMKTYP, SES-O, and SESOVR parameters are not used by this
region and should be defaulted inactive.
7. The following inputs must be addressed: EFK, EFKB, REFK, REFKB, EFO, and ASL.
New York City SES PhaseI Setup
1. The EFS and EFS-CK parameters must be equal to 9.
2. The EFO-P and EFO-CK parameters must be defined to the door and landing associated with
the main SES recall landing.
3. The ASL-P and ASL-CK parameters must be defined to the door and landing associated with
the alternate SES recall landing.
4. If the doors are to close at the designated SES recall landing after a timeout period, then the
EFO-DC parameter must be defined to the delay time in seconds. Note that in order to
reopen the doors, the input HDOB must be used.
5. The FSKTYP parameter must define the active states of the SES PhaseI and PhaseII switches.
6. The ASL2-P, ASL2-C, SMKTYP, SES-O, and SESOVR parameters are not used by this
region and should be defaulted inactive.
7. The following inputs must be addressed: EFK, EFKB, EFO, and ASL.
New York City 1993 SES PhaseI Setup
1. The EFS and EFS-CK parameters must be equal to 15.
2. The EFO-P and EFO-CK parameters must be defined to the door and landing associated with
the main SES recall landing.
3. The ASL-P and ASL-CK parameters must be defined to the door and landing associated with
the alternate SES recall landing.
4. If the doors are to close at the designated SES recall landing after a timeout period, then the
EFO-DC parameter must be defined to the delay time in seconds. Note that in order to
reopen the doors, the input HDOB must be used.
5. The FSKTYP parameter must define the active states of the SES PhaseI and PhaseII switches.
6. The ASL2-P, ASL2-C, SMKTYP, SES-O, and SESOVR parameters are not used by this
region and should be defaulted inactive.
7. The following inputs must be addressed: EFK, EFO, and ASL.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 119 of 235

New Zealand SES PhaseI Setup


1. The EFS and EFS-CK parameters must be equal to 21.
2. The EFO-P and EFO-CK parameters must be defined to the door and landing associated with
the main SES recall landing.
3. If the doors are to close at the designated SES recall landing after a timeout period, then the
EFO-DC parameter must be defined to the delay time in seconds. Note that in order to
reopen the doors, the input HDOB must be used.
4. The FSKTYP parameter must define the active states of the SES PhaseI and PhaseII switches.
5. The SMKTYP bitmask parameter describes the active states of the SES smoke sensors:
An active low building smoke sensor must be used by setting the ‘E’ bit to 0.
An active low machine room landing sensor must be used by setting the ‘1’ bit to 0.
6. The ASL-P, ASL-CK, ASL2-P, ASL2-C, SES-O, and SESOVR parameters are not used by
this region and should be defaulted inactive.
7. The following inputs must be addressed: EFK, EFO, and MREFO.
Singapore SES PhaseI Setup
1. The EFS and EFS-CK parameters must be equal to 18.
2. The EFO-P and EFO-CK parameters must be defined to the door and landing associated with
the main SES recall landing.
3. The ASL-P and ASL-CK parameters must be defined to the door and landing associated with
the alternate SES recall landing.
4. If the doors are to close at the designated SES recall landing after a timeout period, then the
EFO-DC parameter must be defined to the delay time in seconds. Note that in order to
reopen the doors, the input HDOB must be used.
5. The FSKTYP parameter must define the active states of the SES PhaseI and PhaseII switches.
6. The SMKTYP bitmask parameter describes the active states of the SES smoke sensors:
An active low building smoke sensor must be used by setting the ‘E’ bit to 0.
An active low main landing sensor must be used by setting the ‘1’ bit to 0.
7. The SES-O bitmask parameter describes when the SES PhaseI inputs are software latched.
The ‘1’ bit is not used by this region.
The ‘2’ bit is not used by this region.
To enable software latching of the SES PhaseI inputs, the ‘L’ bit is set to 1.
To disable software latching of the SES PhaseI inputs, the ‘L’ bit is set to 1.
8. The SESOVR parameter must be defined to the delay, in seconds, required before overriding
ATT, EHS or ISC operations.
9. The ASL2-P and ASL2-C parameters are not used by this region and should be defaulted
inactive.
10. The following inputs must be addressed: EFK, EFO, ASL, and BYPASS. Note that the
ASL2 input must be defined to the inactive state to prevent the EFK input from appearing to
be latched.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 120 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

Taiwan SES PhaseI Setup


1. The EFS and EFS-CK parameters must be equal to 20.
2. The EFO-P and EFO-CK parameters must be defined to the door and landing associated with
the main SES recall landing.
3. If the doors are to close at the designated SES recall landing after a timeout period, then the
EFO-DC parameter must be defined to the delay time in seconds. Note that in order to
reopen the doors, the input HDOB must be used.
4. The FSKTYP parameter must define the active states of the SES PhaseI and PhaseII switches.
5. The SMKTYP bitmask parameter describes the active states of the SES smoke sensors:
An active low building smoke sensor must be used by setting the ‘E’ bit to 0.
6. The ASL-P, ASL-CK, ASL2-P, ASL2-C, SES-O, and SESOVR parameters are not used by
this region and should be defaulted inactive.
7. The following inputs must be addressed: EFK and EFO.
8. The following outputs must be addressed to allow an SES car to move without having the
DFC signal: DDSR1, DDSR2, DEECR, DESBR, and DSGSR.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 121 of 235

Fire Service Operation, PhaseII (EFS)


Feature Description
Fire service operation is carried out using two operations, recall to a landing (phaseI) and car operation
(phaseII). Many fire service codes are supported.
The car operation is initiated to allow an authorized person to move the car. PhaseII operation is in
compliance with local, state and national codes.
The phaseII operation has two applications, ON and HOLD. During phaseII ON, the car is moved via the
car calls and the doors are controlled by the door open and close buttons. The HOLD feature keeps the
car at the landing with a door opened, disable the door close buttons and prevents calls from registering.

Inputs and Outputs


Name I/O# I/OLink Description Active
ESH 324 InputCar Fire service car switch, HOLD position *
GCES 362 Output
Car Group on fire service phaseII relay -
DCB381 Input Car
Door H
close
button
ESK 385 Input Car Fire service car switch, ON position *
RB 398 Input Car Car call reset button H
RDCB403 Input Car Rear H
door
close
button
SESL 450 Output Car Fire service firehat jewel -
FSIILC 451 Output Car Car on phaseII lamp -
STARTS 728 Input Car Start switch H
ESRUN 730 Input Car Emergency Service Run switch H
DDSR1 731 Output Car Disable Door Switch Relay -
DDSR2 732 Output Car Disable Door Switch Relay -
DEECR 733 Output Car Disable Emergency Exit Contact Relay -
DESBR 734 Output Car Disable Emergency Stop Button Relay -
DSGSR 735 Output Car Disable Safety Gate Shoe Relay -
FSIILH 1385 Output Hall Car on phaseII lamp -
* The FSKTYP parameter defines the fire service switch polarity

Installation Parameters
Name Group Description Disable
EFS 6 Fire service operation code compliance N/A
EFS-CK 6 Fire service operation code compliance check N/A
FSKTYP 6 Fire service switch types N/A
SESPRO 6 Fire service profile selection 0
SES-O 6 Fire service options bitmask N/A
SES-R 6 Fire service PhaseI recall delay N/A

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 122 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

Setup
There are many different fire service operations to satisfy the many code variants. Not all of the inputs,
outputs and installation parameters are used by each code. This description is designed to give the proper
setup instruction with respect to the code variants supported.
SES PhaseII Installation Parameter Values
The EFS and EFS-CK parameters define the fire code operation. If these two parameters do not match,
the car is placed in not available operation and the event code 802 is logged.
0 = Reserved 1 = Automatic SES
2 = Manual SES 3 = ANSI 1987 SES
4 = British SES 5 = Reserved
6 = Chicago 1994 7 = Canadian SES
8 = California SES 9 = New York City SES
10 = Chicago SES 11 = Hawaiian SES
12 = Detroit SES 13 = ANSI 1989 SES
14 = Canadian 1990 SES 15 = New York City 1993 SES
16 = Mass/ANSI 1993 SES 17 = Australian SES
18 = Singapore SES 19 = Hong Kong SES
20 = Taiwan SES 21 = New Zealand SES
The FSKTYP parameter defines the fire service input active states.
0 = Active high PhaseI switch and active high PhaseII switch
1 = Active high PhaseI switch and active low PhaseII switch
2 = Active low PhaseI switch and active low PhaseII switch
3 = Active low PhaseI switch and active high PhaseII switch

Table: Old switch logic vs. New switch logic


Old Switch ESK input ESH input New Switch ESK input ESH input
HOLD L L ON L L
OFF L H ON L H
ON H L OFF H L
ON H H HOLD H H

The SESPRO parameter defines the profile number to use when the car is in SES PhaseII operation and
the car is to move with the doors unlocked.
0 = Disabled, use default profile
1 to 7 = Use profile 1 to 7
The SES-O parameter defines fire service options.
1 bit = 0: The emergency stop input is ignored during SES PhaseI
1 bit = 1: The emergency stop input is allowed during SES PhaseI
2 bit = 0: The emergency stop input is ignored during SES PhaseII
2 bit = 1: The emergency stop input is allowed during SES PhaseII
L bit = 0: Disable software latching of all SES PhaseI inputs
L bit = 1: Enable software latching of all SES PhaseI inputs
The SES-R parameter defines the delay in seconds to have the car perform an SES PhaseI return to the
designated SES recall landing.
0 to 255 = 0 to 255 seconds
SES PhaseII outputs
These generic SES PhaseII operation outputs are activated as follows:
· SESL: Firehat jewel
· FSIILC: Car on SES PhaseII lamp

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 123 of 235

· FSIILH: Car on SES PhaseII lamp


If direction indicators are required, the CDDL and CUDL car link outputs, and the HDDL and HUDL
hall link outputs should be addressed.
Each fire code region should determine which outputs are required and address them accordingly.
ANSI 1987 SES PhaseII Setup
1. The EFS and EFS-CK parameters must be equal to 3.
2. The FSKTYP parameter must define the active states of the SES PhaseI and PhaseII switches.
3. The SESPRO, SES-O, and SES-R parameters are not used by this region and should be
defaulted inactive.
4. The following inputs must be addressed: ESK and ESH.
ANSI 1989 SES PhaseII Setup
1. The EFS and EFS-CK parameters must be equal to 13.
2. The FSKTYP parameter must define the active states of the SES PhaseI and PhaseII switches.
3. The SESPRO, SES-O, and SES-R parameters are not used by this region and should be
defaulted inactive.
4. The following inputs must be addressed: ESK and ESH.
Australian SES PhaseII Setup
1. The EFS and EFS-CK parameters must be equal to 17.
2. The FSKTYP parameter must define the active states of the SES PhaseI and PhaseII switches.
3. The SESPRO, SES-O, and SES-R parameters are not used by this region and should be
defaulted inactive.
4. The following inputs must be addressed: ESK, ESH and STARTS.
Automatic SES PhaseII Setup
1. The EFS and EFS-CK parameters must be equal to 1.
2. The FSKTYP parameter must define the active states of the SES PhaseI and PhaseII switches.
No SES PhaseII inputs are defined for this region.
3. The SES-O bitmask parameter describes when the car is allowed to ignore the in-car
emergency stop input.
The ‘1’ bit is defined by SES PhaseI
To ignore the in-car emergency stop, the ‘2’ bit is set to 0.
To allow the in-car emergency stop, the ‘2’ bit is set to 1.
The ‘L’ bit is not used by this region.
3. The SESPRO and SES-R parameters are not used by this region and should be defaulted
inactive.
4. No inputs must be addressed.
British SES PhaseII Setup
1. The EFS and EFS-CK parameters must be equal to 4.
2. The FSKTYP parameter must define the active states of the SES PhaseI and PhaseII switches.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 124 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

3. The SES-O bitmask parameter describes when the car is allowed to ignore the in-car
emergency stop input.
The ‘1’ bit is defined by SES PhaseI
To ignore the in-car emergency stop, the ‘2’ bit is set to 0.
To allow the in-car emergency stop, the ‘2’ bit is set to 1.
The ‘L’ bit is not used by this region.
3. The SESPRO and SES-R parameters are not used by this region and should be defaulted
inactive.
4. The following inputs must be addressed: ESK and ESH. Note that ESK must be addressed to
the same address as the SES PhaseI EFK input for those cars designated as SES PhaseII
compliant. Also note that ESH must be defaulted according to the above switch logic table.
California SES PhaseII Setup
1. The EFS and EFS-CK parameters must be equal to 8.
2. The FSKTYP parameter must define the active states of the SES PhaseI and PhaseII switches.
3. The SESPRO, SES-O, and SES-R parameters are not used by this region and should be
defaulted inactive.
4. The following inputs must be addressed: ESK and ESH.
Canadian SES PhaseII Setup
1. The EFS and EFS-CK parameters must be equal to 7.
2. The FSKTYP parameter must define the active states of the SES PhaseI and PhaseII switches.
3. The SESPRO, SES-O, and SES-R parameters are not used by this region and should be
defaulted inactive.
4. The following inputs must be addressed: ESK and ESH.
Canadian 1990 SES PhaseII Setup
1. The EFS and EFS-CK parameters must be equal to 14.
2. The FSKTYP parameter must define the active states of the SES PhaseI and PhaseII switches.
3. The SESPRO, SES-O, and SES-R parameters are not used by this region and should be
defaulted inactive.
4. The following inputs must be addressed: ESK and ESH.
Chicago SES PhaseII Setup
1. The EFS and EFS-CK parameters must be equal to 10.
2. The FSKTYP parameter must define the active states of the SES PhaseI and PhaseII switches.
3. The SESPRO, SES-O, and SES-R parameters are not used by this region and should be
defaulted inactive.
4. The following inputs must be addressed: ESK and ESH. Note that ESH should be defaulted
according to the above switch logic table.
5. The following output must be addressed to keep all cars on SES PhaseI operation whenever a
car is on SES PhaseII operation: GCES.
Chicago 1994 SES PhaseII Setup
1. The EFS and EFS-CK parameters must be equal to 06.
2. The FSKTYP parameter must define the active states of the SES PhaseI and PhaseII switches.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 125 of 235

3. The SESPRO, SES-O, and SES-R parameters are not used by this region and should be
defaulted inactive.
4. The following inputs must be addressed: ESK and ESH. Note that ESH should be defaulted
according to the above switch logic table.
5. The following output must be addressed to keep all cars on SES PhaseI operation whenever a
car is on SES PhaseII operation: GCES.
Detroit SES PhaseII Setup
1. The EFS and EFS-CK parameters must be equal to 12.
2. The FSKTYP parameter must define the active states of the SES PhaseI and PhaseII switches.
3. The SESPRO, SES-O, and SES-R parameters are not used by this region and should be
defaulted inactive.
4. The following inputs must be addressed: ESK and ESH.
Hawaiian SES PhaseII Setup
1. The EFS and EFS-CK parameters must be equal to 11.
2. The FSKTYP parameter must define the active states of the SES PhaseI and PhaseII switches.
3. The SESPRO, SES-O, and SES-R parameters are not used by this region and should be
defaulted inactive.
4. The following inputs must be addressed: ESK and ESH.
Hong Kong SES PhaseII Setup
1. The EFS and EFS-CK parameters must be equal to 19.
2. The FSKTYP parameter must define the active states of the SES PhaseI and PhaseII switches.
3. The SESPRO, SES-O, and SES-R parameters are not used by this region and should be
defaulted inactive.
4. The following inputs must be addressed: ESK and ESH. Note that ESK must be addressed to
the same address as the SES PhaseI EFK input for those cars designated as SES PhaseII
compliant. Also note that ESH must be defaulted according to the above switch logic table.
Manual SES PhaseII Setup
1. The EFS and EFS-CK parameters must be equal to 2.
2. The FSKTYP parameter must define the active states of the SES PhaseI and PhaseII switches.
3. The SES-O bitmask parameter describes when the car is allowed to ignore the in-car
emergency stop input.
The ‘1’ bit is defined by SES PhaseI
To ignore the in-car emergency stop, the ‘2’ bit is set to 0.
To allow the in-car emergency stop, the ‘2’ bit is set to 1.
The ‘L’ bit is not used by this region.
3. The SESPRO and SES-R parameters are not used by this region and should be defaulted
inactive.
4. The following inputs must be addressed: ESK and ESH.
Massachusetts/ANSI 1993 SES PhaseII Setup
1. The EFS and EFS-CK parameters must be equal to 16.
2. The FSKTYP parameter must define the active states of the SES PhaseI and PhaseII switches.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 126 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

3. The SESPRO, SES-O, and SES-R parameters are not used by this region and should be
defaulted inactive.
4. The following inputs must be addressed: ESK and ESH.
New York City SES PhaseII Setup
1. The EFS and EFS-CK parameters must be equal to 9.
2. The FSKTYP parameter must define the active states of the SES PhaseI and PhaseII switches.
3. The SESPRO, SES-O, and SES-R parameters are not used by this region and should be
defaulted inactive.
4. The following inputs must be addressed: ESK and ESH. Note that ESH should be defaulted
according to the above switch logic table.
New York City 1993 SES PhaseII Setup
1. The EFS and EFS-CK parameters must be equal to 15.
2. The FSKTYP parameter must define the active states of the SES PhaseI and PhaseII switches.
3. The SESPRO, SES-O, and SES-R parameters are not used by this region and should be
defaulted inactive.
4. The following inputs must be addressed: ESK and ESH.
New Zealand SES PhaseII Setup
1. The EFS and EFS-CK parameters must be equal to 21.
2. The FSKTYP parameter must define the active states of the SES PhaseI and PhaseII switches.
3. The SESPRO, SES-O, and SES-R parameters are not used by this region and should be
defaulted inactive.
4. No inputs need to be addressed since all the cars automatically enter SES PhaseII operation
after recalled to the designated SES recall landing.
Singapore SES PhaseII Setup
1. The EFS and EFS-CK parameters must be equal to 18.
2. The FSKTYP parameter must define the active states of the SES PhaseI and PhaseII switches.
3. The SES-R parameter defines the delay , in seconds, until the car begins an SES PhaseI recall
after the SES PhaseI EFK input is deactivated.
4. The SESPRO parameter is not used by this region and should be defaulted inactive.
5. The following inputs must be addressed: ESK and ESH. Note that ESK must be addressed to
the same address as the SES PhaseI EFK input for those cars designated as SES PhaseII
compliant. Also note that ESH must be defaulted according to the above switch logic table.
Taiwan SES PhaseII Setup
1. The EFS and EFS-CK parameters must be equal to 20.
2. The FSKTYP parameter must define the active states of the SES PhaseI and PhaseII switches.
3. The SES-O, and SES-R parameters are not used by this region and should be defaulted
inactive.
4. The SESPRO parameter defines the profile to use during SES PhaseII movement with the
doors unlocked.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 127 of 235

5. The following inputs must be addressed: ESK, ESH and ESRUN. Note that ESH should be
defaulted according to the above switch logic table.
6. The following outputs must be addressed to allow an SES car to move without having the
DFC signal: DDSR1, DDSR2, DEECR, DESBR, and DSGSR.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 128 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

Flicker Signals Feature


Feature Description
Some codes require signals to flicker on and off. This operation flickers all the listed signals. Individual
signals can not be chosen.

Inputs and Outputs


Name I/O# I/O Link Description Active
BUZ 376 Output Car Car buzzer -
ERL 384 Output Car Express running lamp -
FDL 386 Output Car Further demand lamp -
FSL 387 Output Car Fire service lamp -
ISCL 389 Output Car Independent service lamp -
NSLC 395 Output Car Non-stop lamp -
OLS 396 Output Car Overload lamp -
RFSL 416 Output Car Rear fire service lamp -
ROLS 418 Output Car Rear overload lamp -
FDLD 427 Output Car Further demand lamp down -
FDLU 428 Output Car Further demand lamp up -
SESL 450 Output Car Fire hat jewel in COP -
ARL 1287 Output Hall Attendant running lamp -
INLH 1296 Output Hall Independent service lamp -
NSLH 1297 Output Hall Non-stop lamp -
FSR 2494 Output Group Fire Service Lamp, Group link -
GFSL1- Outp Group Group -
602564- ut Fire
2623 Servic
e
Lamp
1-60

Installation Parameters
Name Group Description Disable
EN-SFR 8 Enable signal flicker 0

Setup
The EN-SFR parameter enables this feature.
· 0 = Disabled
· 1 = Enabled

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 129 of 235

Generic Security
Feature Description
Generic Security utilizes inputs from various sources such as key switches, clocks, or any other hardware
device from any of the RSL links (car,hall,group). Additionally, generic security can be utilized through
EMS provided the appropriate Subtype/Byte/Bit information is defined.
The car(s) which physically have the group link attached are considered the master cars and will be
responsible for dispatching the generic group security messages around the ring. The method for
detecting which car(s) is the master car, is through the RSL input, GSMAST. If a car detects that the
GSMAST RSL input is active, that car will be the master car for generic security. All other cars in the
group will be responsible for reading their security messages from the ring and implementing the
specified cutoff operations.
For maximum flexibility, a table is defined with elements specifying the type of security operation, the
cars that will be affected, and the landings that will be affected. Each element in the table contains the
following items:
Input source Indicates which RSL link the RSL input is addressed on or whether the
security operation is being requested from EMS. A value of 0 represents the group
link, 1 represents the hall link, 2 represents the car link, and 3 indicates the request
will be from EMS.
RSL input The input that will activate the security operation specified in the element.
Normally a key switch or clock contact.
OR

EMS Subtype/ The EMS defined message subtype/byte/bit information to indicate that EMS
is Byte/Bit requesting a security operation.
RSL state Indicates if the RSL input is an active-high or active-low signal. A value of 0
represents an active-high signal, and a value of 1 represents an active-
low signal.
Floor affected The floor number that will be affected when the specified input or request
becomes active.
Cutout mask Defines the call types that will be secured at the specified floor when the
specified input or request becomes active.
Extended call Not implemented yet. Will be used for future expansion.
mask
Cars affected Defines the cars in the group that will be affected when the specified input or
mask request becomes active.
RSL output Lamp output that indicates that the RSL input or EMS request is active. This
output is specified on the group RSL link.
By the setup of the elements in the generic security table, different security configurations are allowed, as
shown in the examples below.
If multiple elements affect the same car(s) at the same landing, the cutoff masks are OR'd together.
Thus, if one element cuts off hall calls at a landing, and another element cuts off car calls at the same
landing, when they are both activated, car and hall calls are secured.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 130 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

Inputs and Outputs


Name I/O# I/O Link Description Active
GSMAST 2538 Input Group Generic security master car input H

Installation Parameters
Name Group Description Disable
SEC-O 7 Security Options N/A

Setup

NOTE
In a multi-car group with dual hall button risers, both hall
button risers (group links) must have the GSMAST signal
wired on the group link. It is also imperative that all the cars
in the group have the exact same generic group security
tables. If the car attached to hall button riser A has different
table contents that the car attached to hall button riser B, the
resulting group security operation will be unreliable.
Simplex Configuration
In a simplex configuration, the individual floor inputs are usually placed on the hall link, with the
GSMAST input being set to "01-0" (always high).
Group Configuration
In a group configuration, the individual floor inputs are usually located on the group link, but some
contracts may have specific car and/or hall inputs for their security operations. The GSMAST input must
be configured to a tied high RSL input on the group link in order to identify the group security master
car. All cars must have the same address assigned to the GSMAST input. The default 01-0 should not
be used in a multi-car configuration.
Service Tool Setup
The generic group security elements can be edited using the service tool. For each element in the table,
the eight data segments are individually accessible. Editing the security table elements is done by
selecting the SETUP menu on the service tool.
To move through the elements in the group security table, the GO ON and GO BACK keys are used. To
move through the data segments for each element, the UP and DOWN keys are used. The service tool
interface is shown below.
Input Source

SECLINK OLD NEW


E001 = G G
Defines whether input source is either RSL or EMS. Pressing 0 selects G (group), pressing 1
selects H (hall), pressing 2 selects C (car), and pressing 3 selects EMS.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 131 of 235

RSL input (input source 0, 1, or 2)

SECI ADR B ADR B


E001 nn x nn x
Defines the input RSL address that activates the cutoff operation specified in this element. The
address is entered in normal RSL notation, with nn = RSL address, x = RSL pin.

EMS activation (input source 3)

SECI O SBb N SBb


E001 = nxz nxz
Defines the EMS message subtype/byte/bit information to indicate which EMS request will
activate the specified operation in this element. This data is to be entered as nxz where n =
subtype, x = byte, and z = bit.

RSL state

SECSTATE OLD NEW


E001 = HI LOW
Defines whether the RSL input signal is treated as active-high or active-low. Pressing 0 selects
HI, pressing 1 selects LOW.

Floor affected segment

SECFLOOR OLD
NEW E001 =
001 003
Defines the landing that will be affected when security is activated. This can be any valid floor
position.

Cutout mask segment

SECMK CUDE
CUDE E001 1110
0000
Defines the calls that will be cut off when security is activated. The first group defines call
cutoffs for the front doors, the second group defines call cutoffs for the rear doors.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 132 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

Extended calls mask segment

SECEX CUDE CUDE


E001 1110 0000
This segment is not currently used.

Cars affected mask segment

SECCR ABCD EFGH


E001 1111 1111
Defines the cars that will be affected when security is activated. If any of the eight cars in the
group is to be affected, it's corresponding value is set to "1".

RSL output segment

SECO ADR B ADR B


E001 nn x nn x
Defines the lamp output that indicates security is active. The address is entered in normal RSL
notation, with nn = RSL address, x = RSL pin.
Landings secured through Generic security may require access by building personnel. The G bit of the
SEC-O bitmask parameter defines when Independent Service operation gains access to the secured
landings:
G bit = 0: Allows Independent Service operation to gain access to secured landings
G bit = 1: Does not allow Independent Service operation to gain access to secured landings

Example
· 10 story building, 8 cars.
· Single key switch, active high signal on group link.
· Key switch secures front hall calls on top 5 floors of all 8 cars.
· Lamp to signal activation of security.

Setup
Because five landings are being secured, five elements are used. The single security key switch will be
assigned to the RSL input for all five elements. If a key switch has a lamp output, and multiple elements
are activated by that key switch, only one of the elements needs to specify the lamp output (as shown in
element #1 in this example).

Element Input RSL/ RSL Floor Std. calls Ext. calls Affected RSL
source EMS state affecte cars in output
data d CUDE CUDE CUDE CUDE group ABCD
EFGH
1 Group 60-1 HIG 6 0110 0000 0000 0000 1111 1111 34-3
H
2 Group 60-1 HIG 7 0110 0000 0000 0000 1111 1111 00-0

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 133 of 235

H
3 Group 60-1 HIG 8 0110 0000 0000 0000 1111 1111 00-0
H
4 Group 60-1 HIG 9 0110 0000 0000 0000 1111 1111 00-0
H
5 Group 60-1 HIG 10 0010 0000 0000 0000 1111 1111 00-0
H

Example
· 5 story building, 4 cars.
· Key switch for each landing of the building, active high signal on group link.
· Each key switch cuts off the front car calls at it's assigned landing.
· No lamps.

Setup
There is an element for each key switch, defining the landing secured and the car calls secured at that
landing.

Element Input RSL/ RSL Floor Std. calls Ext. calls Affected RSL
source EMS state affecte cars in output
data d CUDE CUDE CUDE CUDE group ABCD
EFGH
1 Group 60-1 HIG 1 1000 0000 0000 0000 1111 0000 00-0
H
2 Group 60-2 HIG 2 1000 0000 0000 0000 1111 0000 00-0
H
3 Group 60-3 HIG 3 1000 0000 0000 0000 1111 0000 00-0
H
4 Group 60-4 HIG 4 1000 0000 0000 0000 1111 0000 00-0
H

Example
· 6 story building, 3 cars.
· Two key switches for each landing, active low signal on group link.
· First landing key switch secures hall calls at landing.
· Second landing key switch secures car calls at landing.
· No lamps.

Setup
Each landing has two elements to handle the two cutoff operations, one for cutting of hall calls, and the
other for cutting off car calls. Each element also has a unique RSL address. Note that this example
illustrates how generic security could be defined for a lobby panel, due to the RSL/EMS data definitions.
For switches located at each landing, a different RSL address should be used to reduce wiring costs.

Element Input RSL/ RSL Floor Std. calls Ext. calls Affected RSL
source EMS state affecte cars in output
data d CUDE CUDE CUDE CUDE group ABCD
EFGH
1 Group 58-1 LOW 1 1000 0000 0000 0000 1110 0000 00-0

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 134 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

2 Group 58-2 LOW 1 0100 0000 0000 0000 1110 0000 00-0
3 Group 58-3 LOW 2 1000 0000 0000 0000 1110 0000 00-0
4 Group 58-4 LOW 2 0110 0000 0000 0000 1110 0000 00-0
5 Group 59-1 LOW 3 1000 0000 0000 0000 1110 0000 00-0
6 Group 59-2 LOW 3 0110 0000 0000 0000 1110 0000 00-0
7 Group 59-3 LOW 4 1000 0000 0000 0000 1110 0000 00-0
8 Group 59-4 LOW 4 0110 0000 0000 0000 1110 0000 00-0
9 Group 60-1 LOW 5 1000 0000 0000 0000 1110 0000 00-0
10 Group 60-2 LOW 5 0110 0000 0000 0000 1110 0000 00-0
11 Group 60-3 LOW 6 1000 0000 0000 0000 1110 0000 00-0
12 Group 60-4 LOW 6 0010 0000 0000 0000 1110 0000 00-0

Example
· 6 story building, 3 cars.
· One key switch, active high signal on group link.
· Key switch cuts off car and hall calls for last two cars in group.
· Key switch also cuts off car and hall calls to top floor of first car.
· No lamps.

Setup
One element is required for each landing secured. The element for the first five landings affect cars B &
C only, but the element for the last landing affects all three cars.

Element Input RSL/ RSL Floor Std. calls Ext. calls Affected RSL
source EMS state affecte cars in output
data d CUDE CUDE CUDE CUDE group ABCD
EFGH
1 Group 60-1 HIG 1 1100 0000 0000 0000 0110 0000 00-0
H
2 Group 60-1 HIG 2 1110 0000 0000 0000 0110 0000 00-0
H
3 Group 60-1 HIG 3 1110 0000 0000 0000 0110 0000 00-0
H
4 Group 60-1 HIG 4 1110 0000 0000 0000 0110 0000 00-0
H
5 Group 60-1 HIG 5 1110 0000 0000 0000 0110 0000 00-0
H
6 Group 60-1 HIG 6 1010 0000 0000 0000 1110 0000 00-0
H

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 135 of 235

Example
· 9 story building, 4 cars, lobby at 4th landing.
· One key switch, active high signal on hall link.
· Key switch shuts down cars A & B by excluding all hall calls.
· Key switch also prevents car C from serving above lobby.
· Key switch also prevents car D from serving below lobby.
· Lamp to signal security active on group link.

Setup
Because the security operation for cars A & B is identical, the first nine elements are used to secure their
hall calls. Additional elements 10-15 prevent car C from answering up hall calls at the lobby, and from
serving any calls above the lobby. Additional elements 16-19 prevent car D from serving down hall calls
at the lobby, and from serving any calls at the landings below the lobby.
Note that if this car does not have the group link, the GSMAST input is never seen, rendering this setup
useless.

Element Input RSL/ RSL Floor Std. calls Ext. calls Affected RSL
source EMS state affecte cars in output
data d CUDE CUDE CUDE CUDE group ABCD
EFGH
1 Hall 60-1 HIG 1 0100 0000 0000 0000 1100 0000 55-2
H
2 Hall 60-1 HIG 2 0110 0000 0000 0000 1100 0000 00-0
H
3 Hall 60-1 HIG 3 0110 0000 0000 0000 1100 0000 00-0
H
4 Hall 60-1 HIG 4 0110 0000 0000 0000 1100 0000 00-0
H
5 Hall 60-1 HIG 5 0110 0000 0000 0000 1100 0000 00-0
H
6 Hall 60-1 HIG 6 0110 0000 0000 0000 1100 0000 00-0
H
7 Hall 60-1 HIG 7 0110 0000 0000 0000 1100 0000 00-0
H
8 Hall 60-1 HIG 8 0110 0000 0000 0000 1100 0000 00-0
H
9 Hall 60-1 HIG 9 0010 0000 0000 0000 1100 0000 00-0
H
10 Hall 60-1 HIG 4 0100 0000 0000 0000 0010 0000 00-0
H
11 Hall 60-1 HIG 5 1110 0000 0000 0000 0010 0000 00-0
H
12 Hall 60-1 HIG 6 1110 0000 0000 0000 0010 0000 00-0
H
13 Hall 60-1 HIG 7 1110 0000 0000 0000 0010 0000 00-0
H
14 Hall 60-1 HIG 8 1110 0000 0000 0000 0010 0000 00-0
H
15 Hall 60-1 HIG 9 1010 0000 0000 0000 0010 0000 00-0
H
16 Hall 60-1 HIG 1 1100 0000 0000 0000 0001 0000 00-0
H

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 136 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

17 Hall 60-1 HIG 2 1110 0000 0000 0000 0001 0000 00-0
H
18 Hall 60-1 HIG 3 1110 0000 0000 0000 0001 0000 00-0
H
19 Hall 60-1 HIG 4 0010 0000 0000 0000 0001 0000 00-0
H

Example
· Hospital building, 6 cars with 10 stops.
· EMS request.
· On request from EMS, cars D through F unable to answer emergency hospital calls.

Setup
When EMS requests this operation, cars D through F are prevented from answering emergency hospital
calls, but cars A through C are still able. Because 10 landings are affected, 10 elements are created, all
using the same EMS request (subtype/byte/bit) for activation. The EMS request data can be assigned to
any subtype, byte and bit under the Information State and Request message. In this example, the
security request from EMS is assigned to subtype 1, byte 3, bit 2. Refer to the Ring Communications:
Contractible Bits chapter for more infomation on the communications.

Element Input RSL/ RSL Floor Std. calls Ext. calls Affected RSL
source EMS state affecte cars in output
data d CUDE CUDE CUDE CUDE group ABCD
EFGH
1 EMS 1,3,2 HIG 1 0001 0000 0000 0000 0001 1100 00-0
H
2 EMS 1,3,2 HIG 2 0001 0000 0000 0000 0001 1100 00-0
H
3 EMS 1,3,2 HIG 3 0001 0000 0000 0000 0001 1100 00-0
H
4 EMS 1,3,2 HIG 4 0001 0000 0000 0000 0001 1100 00-0
H
5 EMS 1,3,2 HIG 5 0001 0000 0000 0000 0001 1100 00-0
H
6 EMS 1,3,2 HIG 6 0001 0000 0000 0000 0001 1100 00-0
H
7 EMS 1,3,2 HIG 7 0001 0000 0000 0000 0001 1100 00-0
H
8 EMS 1,3,2 HIG 8 0001 0000 0000 0000 0001 1100 00-0
H
9 EMS 1,3,2 HIG 9 0001 0000 0000 0000 0001 1100 00-0
H
10 EMS 1,3,2 HIG 10 0001 0000 0000 0000 0001 1100 00-0
H

Example
· 4 car group in 5 story building.
· During the day, clock input on group link prevents car D from answering rear calls.
· Signal lamp on group link shows when calls are disabled.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 137 of 235

Setup
Car D is a service car which cannot handle rear calls during the day. For each landing, an element is
prepared which will disable rear car and hall calls when the clock input goes high. The lamp output is
specified on element 1. The clock input is addressed as 51-1, and the lamp output is addressed as 51-2.

Element Input RSL/ RSL Floor Std. calls Ext. calls Affected RSL
source EMS state affecte cars in output
data d CUDE CUDE CUDE CUDE group ABCD
EFGH
1 Group 51-1 HIG 1 0000 1100 0000 0000 0001 0000 51-2
H
2 Group 51-1 HIG 2 0000 1110 0000 0000 0001 0000 00-0
H
3 Group 51-1 HIG 3 0000 1110 0000 0000 0001 0000 00-0
H
4 Group 51-1 HIG 4 0000 1110 0000 0000 0001 0000 00-0
H
5 Group 51-1 HIG 5 0000 1010 0000 0000 0001 0000 00-0
H

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 138 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

Hall Button Protection Operation (HBP)


Feature Description
Hall button protection operation activates when the group link fails. After the car answers all pending
calls assigned, it returns to the hall button protection position and shuts down with a door opened. At this
point, if wild car operation is activated, the car enters wild car operation to serve the building.

Inputs and Outputs


Name I/O# I/O Link Description Active
GRPFBK 2510 Input Group Group feedback for hall button protection H
GRPTST 2511 Output Group Group output for hall button protection -

Installation Parameters
Name Group Description Disable
HBP-P 5 Hall button protection position 255
HBP-O 5 Hall button protection options N/A

Setup
The HBP-P parameter defines the hall button protection return landing. To disable hall button protection,
set the HBP-P parameter to 255. The HBP-O parameter is a bit mask which specify the following hall
button protection options:
· F bit = 0: keep the front doors closed at the HBP position
· F bit = 1: open the front doors at the HBP position
· R bit = 0: keep the rear doors closed at the HBP position
· R bit = 1: open the rear doors at the HBP position
The GRPTST output and GRPFBK input are connected together through an RS4A remote serial board on
the group link. The GRPTST output is toggled, while monitoring the GRPFBK input for feedback from
the output. If the GRPFBK input does not toggle, the group link is assumed to be failed. Note that there
is a chance the RS4A board is malfunctioning. The RS4A board needs some modifications.
· A pull-up resistor must be added between E14 and E8. The recommended resistor is a 4.7k,
1/4 watt 5% component.
· A jumper must be added between E8 and E4 to tie the input to the output. This requires that
pin 4 of the input and output be reserved for this operation on at least one RS4 board on each
group link.
Only one car needs to be reading the group link, to prevent the entire group from entering hall button
protection, but every car needs this change since any car can be reading the group link.
Note that with a double riser, both risers must be installed with the hall button protection setup. This
allows one riser to fail without triggering hall button protection operation.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 139 of 235

Hall Call Card Reader (HCR)


Feature Description
Enabling hall call card reader disables specified hall calls, except when the hall card reader contact is
active. The car continues to be involved with group operations.

Inputs and Outputs


Name I/O# I/O Link Description Active
CRIG01 - 2327 Input Group Front hall call card reader, landing 01 - 80 H
CRIG80 -
2406
RCRIG01 - 2407 Input Group Rear hall call card reader, landing 01 - 80 H
RCRIG80 -
2486
HCRC 2496 Input Group Hall call card reader contact H

Installation Parameters
Name Group Description Disable
EN-HCR 7 Enable hall call card reader 0

Setup
Hall call card reader operation can be activated by the HCRC input, or by a request from EMS.
The EN-HCR parameter needs to be defined according to the desired hall call card reader operation.
· 0 = All hall calls allowed
· 1 = Activation of card reader allows hall calls
· 2 = Activation of card reader and the landing input allows hall calls

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 140 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

Hall Call Cutoff


Feature Description
Activation of this feature disables all hall calls, while allowing car calls. The car remains in the group.

Inputs and Outputs


Name I/O# I/O Link Description Active
HCOC 323 Input Car Hall call cutoff switch L
HCCO 1309 Input Hall Hall call cutoff switch L
HCOG 2504 Input Group Hall call cutoff switch L

Installation Parameters
None.

Setup
At least one of the three inputs needs to be addressed.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 141 of 235

Hall Call Cutoff Operation (CHC)


Feature Description
Activation of this feature disables all hall calls, while allowing car calls. When the car has no further
demand, it parks with a door open at the last landing served. The car is removed from the group.
This operation can be activated via a toggle switch in most controllers.

Inputs and Outputs


Name I/O# I/O Link Description Active
RCCOC 357 Input Car Rear car call cutoff switch H
CHCC 426 Input Car Hall call cutoff switch H
CHCS 2489 Input Hall Hall call cutoff switch H

Installation Parameters
None.

Setup
At least one of the two hall call cutoff inputs needs to be addressed.
If no rear car calls are desired, then the RCCOC input needs to be addressed.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 142 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

Independent Service Operation (ISC)


Feature Description
Independent service operation removes the car from the group, permitting it to respond to registered car
calls while prohibiting the doors from closing unless constant pressure is applied to a start button. While
on this operation, the car ignores all hall calls and the hall lanterns do not illuminate.

Inputs and Outputs


Name I/O# I/O Link Description Active
DCB381 Input Car Door H
close
button
ISCL 389 Output Car Independent service lamp -
ISD 390 Input Car Independent service start down H
ISS 391 Input Car Independent service switch H
ISU 392 Input Car Independent service start up H
RDCB403 Input Car Rear H
door
close
button
INLH 1296 Output Hall Independent service lamp -
ISCL 1354 Output Hall Independent service lamp -
ISSH 1357 Input Hall Independent service hall switch H

Installation Parameters
Name Group Description Disable
ISC-O 3 Independent service options bitmask N/A

Setup
The desired outputs need to be addressed.
If the Independent Service Direction Buttons are to be used as start buttons, then the ISU and ISD inputs
must be addressed.
At least one of the inputs, ISS or ISSH, must be addressed.
The ISC-O bitmask parameter defines the Independent Service options.
· D = 1 enables the door close buttons as start buttons, while 0 disables them
· * = Reserved for future use
· I = 1 enables the Independent Service buttons as start buttons, while 0 disables them
· B = 1 enables the car call buttons as start buttons, while 0 disables them
· O = 1 enables call cancelation when a door opens, while 0 disables it
· C = 1 indicates the ISS input is active low, while 0 indicates it is active high
· H = 1 indicates the ISSH input is active low, while 0 indicates it is active high
The power failure routine to reopen a door after a power failure is only available when the car has a door
close button and the ‘D’ bit of the ISC-O parameter is set to 1. This will soon be expanded to include the
other start button options.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 143 of 235

If the ‘B’ bit of the ISC-O parameter is set to 1, the doors shall close with reversals. This is to avoid the
doors from closing at full speed without reversals for an elevator with the I/O module car call buttons
which latch active via the hardware. To overcome a false firing reversal device, a door close button must
be activated, even if not selected as the start button.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 144 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

Inverted Rise
Feature Description
Inverts all operational control for rises with the lobby closer to the top of the rise. This feature requires
many EEPROM changes, which are discussed below in Setup.
Note that an Inverted Rise also requires an inverted version of the EMS to process the inverted ring
message. The ADS will function in a group with an inverted rise.

Inputs and Outputs


None. Note that many changes to the existing Inputs and Outputs are needed, as shown below.

Installation Parameters
Name Group Description Disable
INVERT 2 Inverted rise. 0
Note that many changes to the existing Installation Parameters are needed, as specified below.

Setup
Inverted Rise is enabled by setting the INVERT parameter to one.
For the operation to work correctly, all position and direction dependent EEPROM variables which
interface the OCSS to a peripheral device must be inverted. The following list indicates the EEPROM
variables which need to be inverted:
· MCSS Floor Translation Table
· Position Dependent Installation Parameters
· Car Call Buttons
· Hall Call Buttons
· Hall Call Lanterns
· Car Direction Lanterns
· Position Indicator Table
· Allowed Masks

Note that other features not included in this list may also need to be inverted to operate correctly. One
example is card reader operation.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 145 of 235

Example
The following example shows the inversion process for a rise with five landings, physically numbered: 1,
2, 3, 4, 5 from lowest to highest. The BOTTOM landing is physically the fifth landing, the LOBBY
landing is physically the fourth landing, and the TOP landing is physically the first landing.

MCSS Floor Translation Table


To invert the MCSS position information, the relative positions of the Floor Translation Table need to be
inverted as follows:

Landing Un-inverted Inverted Translation


Translation
1 1 5
2 2 4
3 3 3
4 4 2
5 5 1

Position Dependent Installation Parameters


To invert the Position Dependent Installation Parameters, the relative positions of the parameters must be
inverted as follows:

Parameter Physical Landing Inverted Value


BOTTOM 5 1
LOBBY 4 2
TOP 1 5
. . .
. . .
. . .
Note that any other Position Dependent Installation Parameters must be inverted the same way as the
BOTTOM, LOBBY, and TOP specified above. For example, if the Fire Service Return landing is
physically at the fourth landing (same as the lobby), the EFO-P parameter must be set to two.

Car Call Buttons


To invert the Car Call Buttons the relative positions of the buttons need to be inverted as follows:

I/O Number Un-inverted Address Inverted Address


1 34 1 35 1
2 34 2 34 4
3 34 3 34 3
4 34 4 34 2
5 35 1 34 1

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 146 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

Up Hall Call Buttons


To invert the Up Hall Call Buttons, the relative positions of the buttons need to be inverted and the
buttons must be mapped to the Down Hall Call Buttons as follows:

I/O Number Un-inverted Address Inverted Address


1847 04 1 08 2
1848 05 1 07 2
1849 06 1 06 2
1850 07 1 05 2
1851 -- - -- -

Down Hall Call Buttons


To invert the Down Hall Call Buttons, the relative positions of the buttons need to be inverted and the
buttons must be mapped to the Up Hall Call Buttons as follows:

I/O Number Un-inverted Address Inverted Address


1927 -- - -- -
1928 05 2 07 1
1929 06 2 06 1
1930 07 2 05 1
1931 08 2 04 1

Up Hall Call Lanterns


To invert the Up Hall Call Lanterns, the relative positions of the lanterns need to be inverted and the
lanterns must be mapped to the Down Hall Call Lanterns as follows:

I/O Number Un-inverted Address Inverted Address


805 04 3 08 4
806 05 3 07 4
807 06 3 06 4
808 07 3 05 4
809 -- - -- -

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 147 of 235

Down Hall Call Lanterns


To invert the Down Hall Call Lanterns, the relative positions of the lanterns need to be inverted and the
lanterns must be mapped to the Up Hall Call Lanterns as follows:

I/O Number Un-inverted Address Inverted Address


885 -- - -- -
886 05 4 07 3
887 06 4 06 3
888 07 4 05 3
889 08 4 04 3

Car Direction Lanterns


To invert the Car Direction Lanterns, switch the Up and Down lanterns as follows:

I/O Number Un-inverted Address Inverted Address


377 15 3 15 2
379 15 2 15 3

Position Indicator Table


To invert the Position Indicator Table, the relative positions of the PIs need to be inverted as follows:

Landing Un-inverted PI Inverted PI


1 L=10, R=1 L=10, R=5
2 L=10, R=2 L=10, R=4
3 L=10, R=3 L=10, R=3
4 L=10, R=4 L=10, R=2
5 L=10, R=5 L=10, R=1

Allowed Masks
When inverting the allowed masks, the landings are inverted as well as the Up and Down bits within the
masks. Note that a standard rise with only front doors and no Emergency calls would result in the same
setup after the inversion. To invert the Allowed Masks, the relative positions of the allowed masks need
to be inverted as follows:

Landing Un-inverted Mask Inverted Mask


1 1101 1100 1100 0000
2 1110 1110 1110 0000
3 1110 0000 1110 0000
4 1110 0000 1110 1110
5 1010 0000 1011 1010

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 148 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

Landing Passing Tone (LPT)


Feature Description
The landing passing tone is used to signal landings and car calls.

Inputs and Outputs


Name I/O# I/O Link Description Active
LPT 393 Output Car Landing passing tone -

Installation Parameters
Name Group Description Disable
CC-LPT 8 Landing passing tone for car calls 0

Setup
The LPT output must be addressed.
The CC-LPT parameter defines when the landing passing tone is to sound.
· 0 = Do not sound LPT for car calls, sound LPT for all landings
· 1 = Sound LPT for car calls, sound LPT for all landings
· 2 = Do not sound LPT for car calls, sound LPT for allowed landings
· 3 = Sound LPT for car calls, sound LPT for allowed landings
· 4 = Do not sound LPT for car calls, do not sound LPT for landings
· 5 = Sound LPT for car calls, do not sound LPT for landings
Note that allowed landings means all non-secured landings.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 149 of 235

Lanterns and Gongs


Feature Description
The hall lanterns and gongs need to be defined for each building.

Inputs and Outputs


Name I/O# I/O Link Description Active
CHMU 363 Output Car Chime up signal -
CHMI 364 Output Car Chime initiate NOT -
CDDL 377 Output Car Car down direction lamp -
CDLD 378 Output Car Car direction lantern down -
CUDL 379 Output Car Car up direction lamp -
CDLU 380 Output Car Car direction lantern up -
RCDDL 399 Output Car Rear car down direction lamp -
RCDLD 400 Output Car Rear car direction lantern down -
RCUDL 401 Output Car Rear car up direction lamp -
RCDLU 402 Output Car Rear car direction lantern up -
CDGD 421 Output Car Front car direction gong down -
CDGU 422 Output Car Front gong direction gong up -
RCDGD 423 Output Car Rear car direction gong down -
RCDGU 424 Output Car Rear car direction gong up -
RCHMU 452 Output Car Rear chime up signal -
RCHMI 453 Output Car Rear chime initiate NOT -
CDML 467 Output Car Down motion lamp -
CUML 468 Output Car Up motion lamp -
HDDL 1294 Output Hall Down direction lamp -
HUDL 1295 Output Hall Up direction lamp -
HDML 1390 Output Hall Down motion lamp -
HUML 1391 Output Hall Up motion lamp -

Installation Parameters
Name Group Description Disable
EN-HLC 8 Enable lantern gong for call types N/A
HL-SET 8 Hall lantern definition N/A
GNGDLY 8 Gong Activation/Deactivation Delay For Down Hall Calls N/A

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 150 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

Setup
The HL-SET parameter defines the hall lanterns in use.
· 0 = RS4A gong board or hardware controlled gongs on car link
· 1 = Lanterns/Gongs on same pin
· 2 = RS4 with luxury fixture chime board
· 3 = Software controlled gongs, lamp and gong on separate car link outputs
· 4 = Software controlled gongs, lamp and gong on same car link outputs
· 5 = Hardware controlled gongs, lamp and gong on gong output, gongs activated when doors
fully opened
· 6 = Software controlled gongs, lamp and gong on same hall link output
· 7 = Reserved for ICA Luxury Fixtures
· 8 = Hall lantern combination. If the “H” Special Mask bit is 0 for a landing, use HL-SET = 6.
If the “H” Special Mask bit for a lnding is 1, use HL-SET = 2.
· 9 = Hall lantern combination. If the “H” Special Mask bit is 0 for a landing, use HL-SET = 6.
If the “H” Special Mask bit for a lnding is 1, use HL-SET = 0.
· 10 = Hall lantern combination. If the “H” Special Mask bit is 0 for a landing, use HL-SET =
0. If the “H” Special Mask bit for a lnding is 1, use HL-SET = 2.
If the advanced chime board is used with HL-SET 2, the CHMU and CHMI outputs must be addressed
for the front door and the RCHMU and RCHMI outputs must be defined for the rear door.
The EN-HLC parameter enables lantern gongs for various call types.
· 0 = Gong on hall call only
· 1 = Gong on hall and car calls
The GNGDLY parameter specifies the delay between activation/deactivation/activation of down hall
lanterns and gongs. This only applies to HL-SET = 3, 4, 6, 8, or 9.
· 100 to 255 = 400 milliseconds to 1.02 seconds (4 millisecond timer)
The CDGD, CDGU, RCDGD and RCDGU outputs are addressed when front and rear gongs are used.
The CDDL, CUDL, RCDDL, RCUDL, HDDL, and HUDL outputs display the car's next intended
direction and are activated when the actual landing equals the target landing. Note that if the rise
contains an express zone, these outputs activate halfway through the express zone when the target landing
is a landing adjacent to the express zone.
The CDLD, CDLU, RCDLD, and RCDLU outputs must be addressed for lamps defined on the car link
by the HL-SET parameter.
The CDML, CUML, HDML and HUML outputs display the car's direction of motion on the car and hall
links, respectively.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 151 of 235

Late Push Door Reversal


Feature Description
Allows the doors to reverse a specified number of times when a late push hall call is entered and the car
has demand at another landing.

Inputs and Outputs


None.

Installation Parameters
Name Group Description Disable
REVCNT 3 Late push hall call door reversal count 255

Setup
The REVCNT parameter allows the doors to reverse for a late push hall calls as follows:
0: Late push hall call will always cause a door reversal.
1 to 254: Allow 1 to 254 late push hall call door reversals.
255: Late push hall call will never cause a door reversal.
Note that once the car begins nudging or enters DCP because it can not close its doors, late push hall calls
will no longer be answered by the car.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 152 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

Light and Fan switch-off


Feature Description
The light and fan automatically turn off when the car is idle with the doors closed or shutdown after a
defined delay.

Inputs and Outputs


Name I/O# I/O Link Description Active
LFCC 434 Output Car Light and fan relay control -
LFCG 2492 Output Group Light and fan relay control -

Installation Parameters
Name Group Description Disable
LR-T 3 Light and fan turn off delay N/A

Setup
The LR-T parameter defines the time before a car is allowed to turn off the light and fan in the car.
· 0 to 255 = 0 to 255 seconds
Power is removed from the light and fan via the LFCC or LFCG outputs.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 153 of 235

Limited Door Reversal (LDR)


Feature Description
During the door closing state, an active reversal device force the door to reopen. Once the reversal
device is inactive, the door resumes closing at normal speed.

Inputs and Outputs


None.

Installation Parameters
Name Group Description Disable
LDR 3 Enable limited door reversal N/A

Setup
The LDR parameter specifies the default door reversal command.
· 0 = Full DOB, full EDP, full LRD
· 1 = Full DOB, limited EDP, full LRD
· 2 = Full DOB, limited EDP, limited LRD

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 154 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

Load Non-Stop Operation (LNS)


Feature Description
When the load of the car is determined to be full, the load non-stop operation is triggered. This operation
ignores all hall calls and serves car calls. Once the load of the car falls below the full capacity, the car
exits this mode to allow hall calls assignment to this car.
One exception to this is for a car stopping to serve a car call, and coincidentally, a hall call in the
direction of travel is registered at the landing. In this case, the hall call is answered.

Inputs and Outputs


None.

Installation Parameters
None.

Setup
This operation is triggered using information from MCSS.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 155 of 235

MCSS Offset table


Feature Description
The OCSS uses the number of landings in the group to determine car and hall call positions, while the
MCSS uses the number of door zones for each individual car to determine car positions. This disparity is
resolved by the MCSS offset table located in the OCSS software.

Inputs and Outputs


None.

Installation Parameters
Name Group Description Disable
EN-XLT 9 Enable MCSS offset table 0

Setup
The EN-XLT parameter enables the use of the MCSS offset table.
· 0 = Disabled
· 1 = Enabled
The MCSS offset table is reached via the service tool menus M,1,3,4,4.
The default relationship for the MCSS door zones to the OCSS group landings is 1:1. This relationship
must be re-configured if the group contains Odd Travel features. Refer to the Odd Travel chapter for
more setup information.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 156 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

Group with no odd travel features:


This configuration constitutes a 1:1 relationship between the MCSS door zones and the OCSS
group landings. All cars have their first door zone at the bottom group landing, their second
door zone at the second group landing, and so on to the top landing.

Note that if all cars have the same express zones, there is no need to alter the offset table from a
1:1 relationship. It is only when at least one car within the group has a different hoist way
layout that the offset table need be altered. Also note that this example could easily be handled
by disabling the translation table, but it is here to illustrate the translation tables use.

The MCSS offset table defines the relationship


Group Landing Floor label between the landings a car can serve and the
A B
group layout.
5 4 This example shows both cars with the same
hoistway layout, thus their offset tables are
4 3 mapped 1:1.

3 2
Table # Car A Table # Car B
5 5 5 5
2 L
4 4 4 4
3 3 3 3
1 B
2 2 2 2
1 1 1 1

Note: Table# represents Door Zone number.

Group with odd travel:


When a group has bottom odd travel, one or more cars within the group serve additional bottom
landings. The MCSS offset tables for the cars that do not serve the additional landing must be
changed.

The MCSS offset table defines the relationship


Group Landing Floor label between the landings a car can serve and the
A B
group layout.
5 4 This example shows car A serving additional
landings, thus the offset table for car A is
4 3 mapped 1:1, while the offset table for car B
is mapped accordingly.
3 2
Table # Car A Table # Car B
5 5 5
2 L
4 4 4 5
3 3 3 4
1 B
2 2 2 3
1 1 1 2

Note: Table# represents Door Zone number.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 157 of 235

Group with Mid-Building Odd Travel:


When certain cars within a group don't stop at mid-hoist way landings, an express zone is
defined. The cars with express zones must have their MCSS offset tables changed.

The MCSS offset table defines the relationship


Group Landing Floor label between the landings a car can serve and the
A B
group layout.
5 4 This example shows car B with an express
zone, thus the offset table for car A is
4 3 mapped 1:1, while the offset table for car B
is mapped accordingly.
3 2
Table # Car A Table # Car B
5 5 5
2 L
4 4 4
3 3 3 5
1 B
2 2 2 4
1 1 1 1

Note: Table# represents Door Zone number.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 158 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

Moderate Incoming Traffic (MIT)


Feature Description
Moderate Incoming Traffic (MIT) serves up-peak passengers by forcing the cars in the group to return to
the lobby after serving demand. One car is selected to serve up-peak traffic at the lobby in an attempt to
fill each car with up-peak passengers before it leaves the lobby.

Inputs and Outputs


Name I/O# I/O Link Description Active
UPC 2535 Input Group OCSS Up-peak Clock H
ITLC 321 Output Car Car Performing MIT/CHN Lamp, Car Link -
ITLH 1318 Output Hall Car Performing MIT/CHN Lamp, Hall Link -
GMIT 2541 Output Group Group Performing MIT/CHN Lamp -

Installation Parameters
Name Group Description Disable
MIT-ST 4 MIT Traffic Induced Start Time 0
MIT-T 4 MIT Timeout 0
MIT-LD 4 MIT Load N/A
MIT-MN 4 MIT Minimum Variable Interval Dispatch Time 0
MIT-MX 4 MIT Maximum Variable Interval Dispatch Time 0
MIT-O4 MIT 0
Option
s
FLK-T 8 Flicker enable/speed for hall lanterns 0

Setup
The MIT-ST parameter specifies the period in which two cars, with loads greater than or equal to MIT-
LD, must depart the lobby to begin traffic induced MIT.
· 0 = disable traffic induced MIT
· 1 to 255 = 1 to 255 seconds
The MIT-T parameter specifies the period in which no cars depart the lobby for MIT to be terminated.
· 0 to 255 = 0 to 255 seconds
The MIT-LD parameter defines the load state which activates MIT. This load state is also used to
immediately dispatch a car from the lobby during MIT.
· 0 to 5 = load states 0 to 5
The MIT-MN parameter specifies the minimum interval between the dispatching of cars from the lobby
during MIT operation.
· 0 = disable minimum VID specification, assume 7 seconds
· 7 to 60 = 7 to 60 seconds

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 159 of 235

The MIT-MX parameter specifies the maximum interval between the dispatching of cars from the lobby
during MIT operation.
· 0 = disable maximum VID specification, assume 60 seconds
· 7 to 60 = 7 to 60 seconds
The MIT-O parameter specifies various MIT options using a bit mask. All cars in the group must have
this parameter set to the same value, except for the “B” bit, which can be different in each of the cars.
NOTE: If the Next Selected Car is enabled and both the “F” and “f” bits are zero, the Next Selected Car
will deactivate its lantern at the lobby.
· B = 0: disable No Lobby Bypass for this specific car
· B = 1: enable No Lobby Bypass for this specific car
· D = 0: unselected cars will open their front doors
· D = 1: unselected cars will close their front doors
· U = 0: OCSS up-peak clock activates MIT after a car departs lobby
· U = 1: OCSS up-peak clock immediately activates MIT
· N = 0: disable next selected car
· N = 1: enable next selected car
· F = 0: disable selected car lantern flashing
· F = 1: enable selected car lantern flashing using FLK-T
· f = 0: disable next selected car lantern flashing
· f = 1: enable next selected car lantern flashing using FLK-T
MIT Activation
If the EMS activates its up-peak clock, the group will immediately perform MIT. If the ADS activates its
up-peak clock, the group will immediately perform MIT. If the GCB activates its up-peak clock, the
specific cars chosen by the GCB will immediately perform MIT, while the remaining cars will operate
normally.
MIT will be traffic induced if two cars depart the lobby with a load greater than or equal to the MIT-LD
parameter within the time specified by the MIT-ST parameter. Traffic induced MIT can be disabled by
setting MIT-ST to zero. Traffic induced MIT is disabled if the GCB is part of the group.
If the “U” bit of the MIT-O parameter is set to zero and the UPC signal is active, MIT will be clock
induced after one car leaves the lobby with a load greater than or equal to the MIT-LD parameter. If the
“U” bit of the MIT-O parameter is set to one and the UPC signal is active, MIT will be immediately
clock induced. The UPC signal is disabled if the ADS or GCB is part of the group.
MIT Termination
If the EMS, ADS, or GCB activated MIT by turning on its up-peak clock, MIT will be terminated
immediately after the corresponding subsystem deactivates its up-peak clock.
If the OCSS activated up-peak, MIT will be terminated when the UPC signal is deactivated and the
period specified by the MIT-T parameter expires. Each time a car with a load greater than or equal to
MIT-LD leaves the lobby, MIT will continue for at least the time specified by MIT-T.
Selected Car
One car at the lobby is selected to serve up-peak traffic. This car is called the Selected Car. The
Selected Car opens its doors at the lobby and activates its front up hall lantern. This lantern may be
flashed by setting the “F” bit of the MIT-O parameter to one and setting the FLK-T parameter with the
desired flickering speed.
When the Selected Car is chosen, its Variable Interval Dispatch (VID) time is calculated. This is the
time the car will wait at the lobby before it serves up-peak traffic. As a default, the VID time can range
from 7 to 60 seconds. The minimum VID time can be increased to a value greater than 7 seconds by

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 160 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

setting up the MIT-MN parameter. The maximum VID time can be decreased to a value less than 60
seconds by setting up the MIT-MX parameter.
The Selected Car is kept at the lobby until the VID time expires or its load state reaches MIT-LD. At
that time, the car is dispatched to serve the up-peak traffic.
Next Selected Car
If the “N” bit of MIT-O parameter is set to one, a car at the lobby will be chosen as the next car to
become the Selected Car. This car is called the Next Selected Car. The purpose of the Next Selected Car
is to get passengers preboarding the next car to leave the lobby, when the Selected Car is becoming full.
The Next Selected Car opens its doors at the lobby and activates its front up hall lantern. This lantern
may be flashed by setting the “f” bit of the MIT-O parameter to one and setting the FLK-T parameter
with the desired flickering speed..
When the Selected Car is dispatched, the Next Selected Car will become the Selected Car and another car
at the lobby will be chosen as the Next Selected Car. If the Next Selected Car reaches the MIT-LD load
state, it will immediately be dispatched to serve up-peak traffic, regardless of whether the Selected Car
was dispatched.
If the Next Selected Car feature is active, either the Selected Car or the Next Selected Car should be
setup to flash its hall lantern so that passengers can tell the difference between the two cars.
Unselected Cars
Cars waiting at the lobby which are not the Selected Car or the Next Selected Car are referred to as
Unselected Cars. These cars will become the Selected Car or Next Selected Car when they are needed.
If the “D” bit of the MIT-O parameter is set to one, Unselected Cars will park with their doors closed.
Otherwise, Unselected Cars will park with their doors opened.
No Lobby Bypass
There are many hall call restrictions built into the MIT algorithm which expedite the return of cars to the
lobby. In addition to these restrictions, a feature called “No Lobby Bypass” can be enabled by setting the
“B” bit of the MIT-O parameter to one in specific cars. Note that the “B” bit of the MIT-O parameter is
the only bit that may be different in each of the cars in the group.
During No Lobby Bypass, any cars with the “B” bit set to one will bypass all hall calls which do not have
a coincident car call at the landing whenever there are no cars at the lobby to serve up-peak traffic. To
ensure that hall calls are properly served during MIT, it is recommended that no more than 25% of the
cars in the group should have this feature enabled.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 161 of 235

Moderate Outgoing Traffic (MOT)


Feature Description
Moderate Outgoing Traffic serves down-peak traffic by preventing cars from parking at the lobby.
During Dynamic Zoned Parking, the parking zones above the lobby are adjusted in size to distribute the
cars evenly throughout the rise.

Inputs and Outputs


Name I/O# I/O Link Description Active
DPC 2536 Input Group OCSS Down-peak Clock H
OTLC 322 Output Car MOT Lamp, Car Link -
OTLH 1319 Output Hall MOT Lamp, Hall Link -

Installation Parameters
Name Group Description Disable
MOT-T 4 MOT Traffic Induced Start Time & MOT Timeout 0
EN-UCB 4 MOT Up Hall Call Bypass 0
MIT-LD 4 MIT Load N/A

Setup
The MOT-T parameter specifies the period in which two cars, with loads greater than or equal to MIT-
LD, must arrive at the lobby to begin traffic induced MOT. The MOT-T parameter also specifies the
period in which no cars arrive at the lobby for MOT to be terminated.
· 0 = disable traffic induced MOT
· 1 to 255 = 1 to 255 seconds
The EN-UCB parameter enables the Up Hall Call Bypass feature during MOT. Any cars with this
parameter set to one will not answer any up hall calls, unless a coincident car call exists at that floor. It
is suggested that no more than 25% of the cars in the group have this feature enabled.
· 0 = up hall call bypass disabled
· 1 = up hall call bypass enabled
MOT Activation
If the EMS activates its down-peak clock, the group will immediately perform MOT. If the GCB
activates its down-peak clock, the group will immediately perform MOT and the cars will park at the
landings dictated by the GCB.
MOT will be traffic induced if two cars arrive at the lobby with a load greater than or equal to the MIT-
LD parameter within the time specified by the MOT-T parameter. Traffic induced MOT can be disabled
by setting MOT-T to zero. Traffic induced MOT is disabled if the GCB is part of the group.
If the DPC signal is active, MOT will be clock induced after one car arrives at the lobby with a load
greater than or equal to the MIT-LD parameter.
MOT Termination
If the EMS or GCB activated MOT by turning on its down-peak clock, MOT will be terminated
immediately after the corresponding subsystem deactivates its down-peak clock.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 162 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

If the OCSS activated down-peak, MOT will be terminated when the DPC signal is deactivated and the
period specified by the MOT-T parameter expires. Each time a car with a load greater than or equal to
MIT-LD arrives at the lobby, MOT will continue for at least the time specified by MOT-T.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 163 of 235

Modernization Setup
Feature Description
Some modernization jobs need special I/O to have the job work correctly with the modular software. The
following outputs may need to be added.

Inputs and Outputs


Name I/O# I/O Link Description Active
RCB 448 Output Car Reset car buttons -
FUHL 1381 Output Hall Front up hall lantern -
FDHL 1382 Output Hall Front down hall lantern -
RUHL 1383 Output Hall Rear up hall lantern -
RDHL 1384 Output Hall Rear down hall lantern -

Installation Parameters
Name Group Description Disable
EN-EMO 1 Enable overlay controller functionality N/A
HB-TYP 1 Hall button type N/A
CB-TYP 1 Car button type N/A
ENMDSG 8 Enable MOD double stroke gong 0

Setup
0 = disable modernization controller functionality
1 = enable modernization controller functionality

The EN-EMO parameter enables/disables modernization controller functionality. This parameter should
be enabled when the OCSS resides on an EMO or TEMO. Once a full MOD controller is in place; for
example, an E411M or E311M controller, this parameter should be disabled.
· 0 = Disable modernization controller functionality
· 1 = Enable modernization controller functionality
The HB-TYP and CB-TYP parameters define the type of buttons present.
· 0 = Default
· 1 = Mechanical
· 2 = Touch tube
The ENMDSG parameter enables the double stroke gongs for EMOs.
· 0 = Disabled
· 1 = Enabled
The RCB output is used to cancel car calls when the car changes direction, or the car enters independent
service, anti-nuisance, and fire service operations.
The FUHL, FDHL, RUHL, and RDHL outputs are generic with respect to the hall lantern types selection.
These outputs always reflect the car's direction. Refer to Lanterns and Gongs for information on hall
lanterns.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 164 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

Non-Selective Door Operation


Feature Description
The double door feature allows the front and rear doors to open from one car call during normal
operation.

Inputs and Outputs


None.

Installation Parameters
Name Group Description Disable
EN-DDO 3 Double door feature 0

Setup
The EN-DDO parameter enables the double door feature.
· 0 = Disabled
· 1 = Enabled

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 165 of 235

Normal Operation (NOR)


Feature Description
Normal operation is a basic operation to move the car in the building to serve basic demand situations.
There are some special features that are only performed during normal operation: special door open
button, door dwell sensor, and door monitoring. There are also some basic setup information needed to
make the elevator group run correctly.

Inputs and Outputs


Name I/O# I/O Link Description Active
SDB 327 Input Car Front special door open button H
RSDB 328 Input Car Rear special door open button H
DWL 373 Input Car Front door dwell sensor H
RDWL 374 Input Car Rear door dwell sensor H

Installation Parameters
Name Group Description Disable
RCB-NO 1 Ring Car Board number N/A
TOP 2 Top of group landing N/A
LOBBY 2 Lobby landing N/A
BOTTOM 2 Bottom of group landing N/A
SPB-NT 3 Special door open button time N/A
DWL-NT 3 Hardware door dwell sensors 0
GROUP 4 Number of cars in group N/A

Setup
The SDB and RSDB inputs open the doors for a specified period of time. The inputs are enabled for each
landing through the “B” bits of the Special Masks on the Service Tool.
at P O W S H B
xx x x x x x x

The “B” bits may be set to the following values:


0 = Special door open buttons not allowed at the landing
1 = Front special door open button allowed at the landing
2 = Rear special door open button allowed at the landing
3 = Front and Rear special door open buttons allowed at the landing
The SPB-NT parameter defines the door dwell time for the special door open buttons.
· 0 - 255 = 0 to 25.5 seconds
The DWL and RDWL inputs are signals from the hardware door dwell sensors. These cause a reversal of
the corresponding door for the defined door dwell sensor time.
The DWL-NT parameter defines the door dwell time for the door dwell sensors.
· 0 - 255 = 0 to 25.5 seconds
The TOP, LOBBY and BOTTOM parameter must be defined as the top landing of the group, lobby
landing of the group, and bottom landing of the group, respectively.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 166 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

· 1 to 64 = Landing 1 to 64
The RCB-NO parameter defines the unique address for the car. This allows the car to receive the correct
messages from the ring communications. Note that even though a number is entered on the service tool,
the corresponding letter is displayed.
· 1 to 8 = Car number 1 to 8
The GROUP parameter defines the maximum number of cars that could be present in the group. This
allow the dispatching of cars to be accurate.
· 1 to 8 = 1 to 8 cars
For door time monitoring, refer to the Door Time Monitoring chapter.
For double door operation, refer to the Non-Selective Door Operation chapter.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 167 of 235

Not Available Operation (NAV)


Feature Description
The not available operation is entered when the fire service parameters are incorrectly set, the car did not
rescue during emergency power, the eathquake operation is not correctly defined, or when the MCSS is
not available.

Inputs and Outputs


None.

Installation Parameters
Name Group Description Disable
EFO-P 6 Main return landing N/A
EFS 6 Fire service operation code compliance N/A
ASL-P 6 Alternate return landing N/A
ASL2-P 6 Second alternate return landing 255
EFO-CK 6 Main return landing check N/A
ASL-CK 6 Alternate return landing check N/A
ASL2-C 6 Second alternate return landing check 255
EFS-CK 6 Fire service operation code compliance check N/A

Setup
Each time this mode is entered, a 700 event is logged.
If the MCSS is ready, the listed parameters need to be correctly set to avoid entering not available
operation.
If events 800, 801, 802 or 803 are logged, refer to the Fire Service: PhaseI Operation chapter for correct
fire service setup.
If event 806 is logged, refer to the Earthquake Operation chapter for correct earthquake setup.
If event 701 is logged, then the car shutdown during an emergency power operation.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 168 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

Nudging (NDG)
Feature Description
If the doors are prevented from closing for a fixed period time, the door reversal devices are rendered
inoperative (except for the door open buttons), a buzzer sounds, and the doors begin to close at a reduced
speed. Normal door operation is resumed when the door fully closes.

Inputs and Outputs


None.

Installation Parameters
Name Group Description Disable
EN-NDG 3 Enable nudging operation 0
NDG-T 3 Nudging time N/A

Setup
If nudging is desired, the EN-NDG parameter needs to be defined.
· 0 = Disabled
· 1 = Enabled
The NDG-T parameter defines the time delay before nudging is entered.
· 0 to 255 = 0 to 255 seconds
Note that the nudging delay should be set less than the DCP delay.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 169 of 235

Odd Travel
Feature Description
Odd Travel is used when one or more landings are not served by all the cars in the group. Some
examples are Bottom Odd Travel, Top Odd Travel and Mid-Building Odd Travel.

Inputs and Outputs


None.

Installation Parameters
Name Group Description Disable
EN-XLT 9 Enable MCSS offset table 0

Setup
Because the switch-over modules connect the group link to any car in the group, each car must be
capable of handling all hall calls in the group, even if the individual car can not serve certain landings.
Therefore, each car in the group must have all the hall buttons addressed to allow all cars the ability to
dispatch every hall call.
The cars must have their allowed masks defined according to the landings able to be served.
The parameters TOP and BOTTOM are defined for each car on a per group basis. This allows all
landings to be dispatched regardless of which car has the group link.
Refer to the MCSS Offset Table chapter for more information on how to setup the Translation table.
The EN-XLT parameter is used to enable the odd travel feature.
· 0 = Disabled
· 1 = Enabled
Note that for buildings to use the car call to terminal landing inputs, the calls to the top or bottom landing
are dependent upon the RSL address in the EEPROM for car calls. This requires that the car call
addresses above the top landing and below the bottom allowed landing are 00-0.
The following examples illustrate how to define Top, Bottom and Mid-Building Odd travel.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 170 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

Bottom Odd Travel.

The MCSS offset table defines the relationship


Group Landing Floor label between the landings a car can serve and the
A B
group layout.
5 4 This example shows car A serving additional
landings, thus the offset table for car A is
4 3 mapped 1:1, while the offset table for car B
is mapped accordingly.
3 2
Table # Car A Table # Car B
5 5 5
2 L
4 4 4 5
3 3 3 4
1 B
2 2 2 3
1 1 1 2

Note: Table# represents Door Zone number.

The Top and Bottom installation parameters would be defined as follows:


Car A: Top = 5, Bottom = 1 Car B: Top = 5, Bottom = 1

All cars must have the hall button I/Os defined for all the landings.

Only car A has a car button for the 1st landing.

The allowed mask for each car defines the calls that each car is capable of answering.
For this example, the allowed masks for each car are:
Car A Car B
Landing CUDE CUDE
5 1 010 1 010
4 11 10 11 10
3 11 10 11 10
2 11 10 11 00
1 11 00 000 0

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 171 of 235

Top Odd Travel.

The MCSS offset table defines the relationship


Group Landing Floor label between the landings a car can serve and the
A B
group layout.
5 4 This example shows car A serving additional
landings, thus the offset table for car A is
4 3 mapped 1:1, while the offset table for car B
is mapped accordingly.
3 2
Table # Car A Table # Car B
5 5 5
2 L
4 4 4 4
3 3 3 3
1 B
2 2 2 2
1 1 1 1

Note: Table# represents Door Zone number.

The Top and Bottom installation parameters would be defined as follows:


Car A: Top = 5, Bottom = 1 Car B: Top = 5, Bottom = 1

All cars must have the hall button I/Os defined for all the landings.

Only car A has a car button for the 5th landing.

The allowed mask for each car defines the calls that each car is capable of answering.
For this example, the allowed masks for each car are:
Car A Car B
Landing CUDE CUDE
5 1 010 0 000
4 11 10 10 10
3 11 10 11 10
2 11 10 11 10
1 11 00 110 0

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 172 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

Top and Bottom Odd Travel.

The MCSS offset table defines the relationship


Group Landing Floor label between the landings a car can serve and the
A B
group layout.
5 4 This example shows car A serving additional
landings, thus the offset table for car A is
4 3 mapped 1:1, while the offset table for car B
is mapped accordingly.
3 2
Table # Car A Table # Car B
5 5 5
2 L
4 4 4
3 3 3 4
1 B
2 2 2 3
1 1 1 2

Note: Table# represents Door Zone number.

The Top and Bottom installation parameters would be defined as follows:


Car A: Top = 5, Bottom = 1 Car B: Top = 5, Bottom = 1

All cars must have the hall button I/Os defined for all the landings.

Only car A has a car button for the 1st and 5th landings.

The allowed mask for each car defines the calls that each car is capable of answering.
For this example, the allowed masks for each car are:
Car A Car B
Landing CUDE CUDE
5 1 010 0 000
4 11 10 10 10
3 11 10 11 10
2 11 10 11 00
1 11 00 000 0

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 173 of 235

Mid-Building Odd Travel.

The MCSS offset table defines the relationship


Group Landing Floor label between the landings a car can serve and the
A B
group layout.
5 4 This example shows car A serving additional
landings, thus the offset table for car A is
4 3 mapped 1:1, while the offset table for car B
is mapped accordingly.
3 2
Table # Car A Table # Car B
5 5 5
2 L
4 4 4
3 3 3 5
1 B
2 2 2 2
1 1 1 1

Note: Table# represents Door Zone number.

The Top and Bottom installation parameters would be defined as follows:


Car A: Top = 5, Bottom = 1 Car B: Top = 5, Bottom = 1

All cars must have the hall button I/Os defined for all the landings.

Only car A has a car button for the 3rd and 4th landings.

The allowed mask for each car defines the calls that each car is capable of answering.
For this example, the allowed masks for each car are:
Car A Car B
Landing CUDE CUDE
5 1 010 1 010
4 11 10 00 00
3 11 10 00 00
2 11 10 11 10
1 11 00 110 0

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 174 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

OtisCheck Signals
Feature Description
OtisCheck is an external system that monitors the operations of an elevator group. OtisCheck records
events within the group, such as car and hall calls, door operations, and car movement. This information
is later analyzed.
Various events in the system drive RSL outputs. OtisCheck is interfaced to these RSL outputs through
the car and group serial links.

Inputs and Outputs


Name I/O# I/O Link Description Active
FCCB01 - 1 - 80 Output Car Front car call TTL, landing 01 - 80 -
FCCB80
RCCB01 - 81 - Output Car Rear car call TTL, landing 01 -80 -
RCCB80 160
EPMOV 347 Output Car Car moving -
INLC 389 Output Car Independent service lamp -
FDO 437 Output Car Front door opening/open signal -
RDO 438 Output Car Rear door opening/open signal -
FDFC 439 Output Car Front door fully closed signal -
RDFC 440 Output Car Rear door fully closed signal -
FNDG 441 Output Car Front door nudging signal -
RNDG 442 Output Car Rear door nudging signal -
FREV 443 Output Car Front door reversal signal -
RREV 444 Output Car Rear door reversal signal -
MOVU 445 Output Car Car moving up signal -
MOVD 446 Output Car Car moving down signal -
LNSL 447 Output Car Load weight bypass signal -
GMIT 2541 Output Group Group in up-peak operation -
GMOT 2542 Output Group Group in down-peak operation -
OOS-A 2543 Output Group Car A out of group signal -
OOS-B 2544 Output Group Car B out of group signal -
OOS-C 2545 Output Group Car C out of group signal -
OOS-D 2546 Output Group Car D out of group signal -
OOS-E 2547 Output Group Car E out of group signal -
OOS-F 2548 Output Group Car F out of group signal -
OOS-G 2549 Output Group Car G out of group signal -
OOS-H 2550 Output Group Car H out of group signal -
FUHB01 - 1847- Output Group Front up hall call TTL, landing 01 - 80 -
FUHB80 1926
FDHB01 - 1927- Output Group Front down hall call TTL, landing 01 - 80 -
FDHB80 2006
RUHB01 - 2087- Output Group Rear up hall call TTL, landing 01 - 80 -
RUHB80 2166
RDHB01 - 2167- Output Group Rear down hall call TTL, landing 01 - 80 -
RDHB80 2246

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 175 of 235

Installation Parameters
None.

Setup
OtisCheck monitors car and group information. The corresponding outputs listed should be addressed for
each of the signals OtisCheck is to monitor.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 176 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

Overload Operation (OLD)


Feature Description
When the load of the car exceeds 125% capacity, overload operation is triggered. This operation opens
the door, sounds the buzzer, and illuminates the overload lamp. The overload condition is removed when
the weight of the car falls below the overload weight.

Inputs and Outputs


Name I/O# I/O Link Description Active
OLS 396 Output Car Car overload lamp -
ROLS 418 Output Car Rear car overload lamp -

Installation Parameters
None.

Setup
This operation is triggered using information from MCSS.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 177 of 235

Park and Shutdown Operation (PKS)


Feature Description
If the car has demand prior to PKS activation, the hall calls are re-assigned and the car calls are served
until the car has no demand with the doors closed. Once this occurs, the park and shutdown operation
brings the car to a landing, places the doors in a defined position, shuts the car down, and illuminates a
lamp. The operation is triggered via a switch or EMS.
The EMS triggering of this operation has an additional feature. The car returns to a landing parking with
a door opened, and waits to receive car call demand. Registration of car call demand, returns the car to
normal operation and the call is served.

Inputs and Outputs


Name I/O# I/O Link Description Active
PKS2 1291 Input Hall Park and shutdown switch H
PKL 1304 Output Hall Park and shutdown lamp

Installation Parameters
Name Group Description Disable
PKS-P 7 Park and shutdown position 255
PKS-O 7 Park and shutdown options N/A

Setup
The PKS-P parameter defines the recall landing for this operation.
· 1 to 64 = Landing 1 to 64
· 255 = Disabled
The PKS-O parameter defines the door states for this operation.
· 0 = Park with front and rear doors closed
· 1 = Park with front doors open
· 2 = Park with rear doors open
· 3 = Park with front and rear doors open
The PKL output lamp illuminates when the car is at the park and shutdown position.
Activation of PKS:
The park and shutdown operation is activated in one of three ways: the PKS2 input (input
induced), an EMS information state and request bit (bit induced), or an EMS enter call message
(command induced). The operational mode is only entered when a valid PKS position is known
and the PKS options are defined.
Termination of PKS:
The feature is terminated when the PKS2 input is off for input induced PKS, the information
state and request bit is inactive for the bit induced PKS, the reset message from EMS is received
for EMS command induced PKS, a car call is registered for EMS command induced PKS wait
for car call mode, or a higher priority operation is activated. Termination of the higher priority
mode allows PKS to be re-activated if the PKS2 input or the EMS information state and request
bit is active. It does not re-activate for EMS command induced PKS.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 178 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

Priority of PKS activation:


The PKS operation is activated in a variety of ways. Because of this, a priority scheme for
activation is defined:
1. EMS command induced PKS
2. EMS bit induced PKS
3. RSL input induced PKS
If PKS operation is active when a higher priority PKS trigger is activated, the car nudges the
doors closed and travels non-stop to the new park and shutdown position and places the doors in
the new door states. If the position is the same as the old position, the car remains at the landing
and updates the door states. If the door states are to be the same, the car remains as is and is
unchanged by the higher priority trigger.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 179 of 235

Parking Operation (PRK): general description


Feature Description
A wide variety of parking algorithms are used in an attempt to cover the needs of many building
configurations. The following table lists each algorithm along with a relative priority. The highest
priority activated algorithm is performed by the car. Note that the default parking algorithm is Dynamic
Zoned parking.

Algorithm Priorit
y
Cyclic parking test 1
Automatic car return 2
Simplex parking 3
Fixed zone parking 4
Dynamic zone parking 5
Note that with certain algorithms, the excluded zone and door open features can be used.

Inputs and Outputs


See desired parking algorithms.

Installation Parameters
See desired parking algorithms.

Setup
See desired parking algorithms.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 180 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

Parking: Automatic Car Return (ARD)


Feature Description
Automatic car return parks the car at a defined landing with the doors in a defined state, when the car has
no demand.

Inputs and Outputs


Name I/O# I/O Link Description Active
ARD 1328 Input Hall Automatic car return switch H

Installation Parameters
Name Group Description Disable
ARD-P 4 Automatic car return landing 255
ARDTYP 4 Automatic car return door operation N/A

Setup
The ARD-P parameters needs to be defined.
· 1 to 64 = landing 1 to 64
· 255 = disabled
The ARDTYP parameter specifies the door options.
· 0 = park with doors closed
· 1 = park with front door open
· 2 = park with rear door open
· 3 = park with both doors open
The active ARD input and a valid ARD landing enables this feature. While this feature is active, the
open field (Op bit) is not used to determine the door states. Note that other cars in the group are notified
that a car is performing ARD parking. As a result, the other cars in the group perform zoned parking
leaving the ARD car out of all calculations.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 181 of 235

Parking: Cyclic Test


Feature Description
Individual cars can repeatedly cycle between two landings when the car has no demand. This is useful
for some system tests.

Inputs and Outputs


None.

Installation Parameters
Name Group Description Disable
TPOS-1 4 Car test cycling, position 1 255
TPOS-2 4 Car test cycling, position 2 255
TDELAY 4 Car test cycling, delay time 255

Setup
The TPOS-1 and TPOS-2 parameters must be defined.
· 1 to 64 = landing 1 to 64
· 255 = disabled
The TDELAY parameter must also be defined.
· 0 to 254 = 0 to 254 seconds
· 255 = disabled
Note that all three parameters must be defined to valid values to have the car cycle between the two
TPOS landings, every TDELAY seconds. If a car or hall call is assigned to the car, the feature is
suspended until the car has no demand with the doors closed.
The Parking - Door Open feature can be used with this algorithm to select the door state.
This feature has the highest parking priority and; therefore, overrides any other parking algorithm. Note
that other cars in the group do not know that a car is performing the cyclic parking algorithm. This car
will not perform any zoned parking algorithm as other cars expect.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 182 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

Parking: Delay Feature


Feature Description
In some cases it's beneficial to delay a car from parking for a brief time period after the idle operation
mode is entered. The delay opens a window where the car can get assigned demand close to its current
position prior to committing to a parking run.

Inputs and Outputs


None.

Installation Parameters
Name Group Description Disable
PRKDLY 4 Parking delay 0

Setup
To delay the car from immediately parking, the PRKDLY parameter needs to be defined.
· 0 = no delay prior to parking the car
· 1 to 255 = 1 to 255 seconds of delay prior to parking the car
Although beneficial in some cases, it is strongly recommended that the PRKDLY parameter be set to
zero (0).

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 183 of 235

Parking: Door Open Feature


Feature Description
The door open feature allows the car to park with it's available doors open.
Parking with the doors open feature keeps the doors open in the idle operation mode, until the car has
demand.

Inputs and Outputs


None.

Installation Parameters
None.

Setup
The Door Open Feature is enabled using the “O” bits of the Special Masks on the Service Tool.
at P O W S H B
xx x x x x x x

The “O” bits may be set to the following values:


0 = Park with the front and rear doors closed
1 = Park with the front door open
2 = Park with the rear door open
3 = Park with the front and rear doors open

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 184 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

Parking: Dynamic zone


Feature Description
The Dynamic Zoned parking algorithm maintains an even parking distribution by adjusting the size and
number of parking zones based upon the number of available cars. If a car is removed from or added to
the group, the number of zones is adjusted and the size of each is recalculated.
Dynamic Zoned parking assumes the traffic is evenly distributed throughout the building. The algorithm
does not account for uneven distribution or odd travel cars.

Inputs and Outputs


None.

Installation Parameters
Name Group Description Disable
CNL 4 Number of cars to park at the lobby N/A
CNL-MN 4 Minimum group requirement for CNL 0
ELZ-P 4 Expanded lobby zone position 255
BPZ-EN 4 Enable basement zone parking 0
BPZ-MN 4 Minimum group requirement for BPZ 0

Setup
It may be desirable to have more than one floor allocated as the lobby parking zone. For example, a rise
has two landing above the lobby and then an express zone. In this case, it could be beneficial to assign
the two landings to an expanded lobby zone. The lobby zone is treated as a single floor parking zone,
unless otherwise specified by the ELZ-P parameter.
· 0 or 255 = disabled
· 1 to 64 = enable expanded lobby zone, ranges from LOBBY to defined position
Several options are provided for lobby zone parking. Most buildings require one car to park at the lobby.
However, certain buildings may require more than one car to handle heavier lobby traffic. In rare cases,
a building may decide to not allow any cars to park in the lobby. The CNL and CNL-MN parameters can
handle all of theses scenarios.
The CNL parameter is used to define the number of cars to park at the lobby landing.
· 0 = no cars park in the lobby
· 1 to 8 = 1 to 8 cars
Parking many cars at the lobby can degrade performance throughout the rest of the rise. To help lessen
the effect, the CNL-MN parameter defines the number of cars required to be in the group for cars with
CNL > 1.
· 0 = disabled, no minimum group requirement
· 1 to 8 = at least 1 to 8 cars required to allow CNL>1

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 185 of 235

Building containing high traffic basements might need a basement parking zone. The BPZ-EN parameter
provides a basement zoning feature.
· 0 = disabled
· 1 = enabled, zone ranges from bottom landing to one landing below the lobby
Parking cars in the basement zone can degrade performance throughout the rest of the rise. To help
lessen the effect, the BPZ-MN parameter defines the number of cars required to be in the group to allow
cars to park in the basement zone.
· 0 = disabled, always attempt to park a car in basement zone
· 1 to 8 = at least 1 to 8 cars required to attempt to park in basement zone
The Parking - Door Open, Parking - Excluded Zone and Parking Delay features can be used with this
algorithm to select the door state and excluded parking landings, respectively.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 186 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

Parking: Excluded Landing Feature


Feature Description
The Excluded Landing Feature prevents cars from parking at a landing.
Excluding a landing from parking only affects the parking operation; cars are still capable of answering
hall and car calls at any landing that is excluded.

Inputs and Outputs


None.

Installation Parameters
None.

Setup
The Excluded Landing Feature is enabled using the “P” bit of the Special Masks on the Service Tool.
at P O W S H B
xx x x x x x x

The “P” bit may be set to the following values:


0 = Car allowed to park at the landing
1 = Car not allowed to park at the landing

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 187 of 235

Parking: Fixed zone


Feature Description
There are instances when the Dynamic Zoned parking algorithm is not suitable for a building. For
example, a building could have uneven traffic distribution, or an odd travel car may only be allowed to
park at certain landings of the rise. In either case, the Dynamic Zoned parking algorithm might attempt
to place a car in an undesirable zone.
Fixed Zoned parking addresses these problems by allowing the parking zones to be divided uniquely.
The number and size of zones are selectable.

Inputs and Outputs


None.

Installation Parameters
Name Group Description Disable
CNL 4 Number of cars to park at the lobby N/A
CNL-MN 4 Minimum group requirement for CNL 0
FZP-EN 4 Fixed zone parking enable 0
FZPMSK 4 Fixed zone parking disable mask N/A
FZP-1B 4 Fixed parking zone 1, bottom landing 255
FZP-1T 4 Fixed parking zone 1, top landing 255
FZP-2B 4 Fixed parking zone 2, bottom landing 255
FZP-2T 4 Fixed parking zone 2, top landing 255
FZP-3B 4 Fixed parking zone 3, bottom landing 255
FZP-3T 4 Fixed parking zone 3, top landing 255
FZP-4B 4 Fixed parking zone 4, bottom landing 255
FZP-4T 4 Fixed parking zone 4, top landing 255
FZP-5B 4 Fixed parking zone 5, bottom landing 255
FZP-5T 4 Fixed parking zone 5, top landing 255
FZP-6B 4 Fixed parking zone 6, bottom landing 255
FZP-6T 4 Fixed parking zone 6, top landing 255
FZP-7B 4 Fixed parking zone 7, bottom landing 255
FZP-7T 4 Fixed parking zone 7, top landing 255
FZP-8B 4 Fixed parking zone 8, bottom landing 255
FZP-8T 4 Fixed parking zone 8, top landing 255

Setup
The FZP-EN parameter needs to be defined.
· 0 = disabled
· 1 to 8 = enable with 1 to 8 zones
The correct number of zones needs to be defined using the FZP-1B through FZP-8T parameters. The
zones must be specified in ascending order and no two zones may overlap.
· 1 to 64 = landing 1 to 64
· 255 disabled

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 188 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

If it is desired to have the lobby zone all to itself, a one floor fixed zone must be specified. this is done
by specifying the bottom and top landing of the same zone to the lobby position. Note that it is possible
to include the lobby in a multiple landing zone or excluded from all zones. Basement zones can also be
defined as long as the above conditions are followed.
If the CNL and CNL-MN parameters are used, it is required that the number and size of zones reflects
the number of cars to park at the lobby landing. The CNL parameter is used to define the number of cars
to park at the lobby landing.
· 1 to 8 = 1 to 8 cars
The CNL-MN parameter defines the number of cars required to be in the group for cars with CNL > 1.
· 0 = disabled, no minimum group requirement
· 1 to 8 = at least 1 to 8 cars required to allow CNL>1
To prevent a car from parking to a specific fixed zone, the FZPMSK bit mask parameter is defined.
· 1 bit: If set, car not allowed to park in zone 1
· 2 bit: If set, car not allowed to park in zone 2
· 3 bit: If set, car not allowed to park in zone 3
· 4 bit: If set, car not allowed to park in zone 4
· 5 bit: If set, car not allowed to park in zone 5
· 6 bit: If set, car not allowed to park in zone 6
· 7 bit: If set, car not allowed to park in zone 7
· 8 bit: If set, car not allowed to park in zone 8
The Parking - Door Open, Parking - Excluded Zone and Parking Delay features can be used with this
algorithm to select the door state and excluded parking landings, respectively.
Note that Fixed Zone parking is of higher priority than Dynamic Zoned parking and; therefore, overrides
the Dynamic Zoned parking. Fixed Zoned parking is not as robust as Dynamic Zoned parking. It's use
should be limited to special cases.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 189 of 235

Parking: Simplex
Feature Description
Simplex parking is performed when only one car in the group can serve hall calls. The car will park at
the last landing served, or at the lobby landing.

Inputs and Outputs


None.

Installation Parameters
Name Group Description Disable
SIMPLX 4 Simplex parking operation 0

Setup
If there is only one car available to answer calls, the SIMPLX parameter is used to determine how the car
should park.
· 0 = park the car at the last stop
· 1 = park the car at the lobby
The Parking - Door Open, Parking - Excluded Zone, and Parking Delay features can be used with this
algorithm to select the door state and excluded parking landings, respectively.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 190 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

Position Indicators
Feature Description
The position indicator can be located on the Car, Hall, and Groups links. Each shows the actual position
of the car.

Inputs and Outputs

Name I/O# I/O Link Description Active


DMOOS 1394 Input Hall Dot Matrix PI Out Of Service Switch H

Installation Parameters
Name Group Description Disable
PI-C 8 Position indicator type, Car link N/A
PI-H 8 Position indicator type, Hall link N/A
PI-G 8 Position indicator type, Group link N/A

Setup
The PI-C parameter specifies the type of PIs used on the Car link. The PI-H parameter specifies the type
of PIs used on the Hall link. The PI-G parameter specifies the type of PIs used on the Group link.
· 0 = 7/16 segment PI (Supports 64 landings)
· 1 = multilight PI using Remote Interface Board (Supports 24 landings)
· 2 = dot matrix PI without direction indicator (Supports 31 landings)
· 3 = dot matrix PI with direction indicator (Supports 31 landings)
The alphanumeric characters for the 7/16 segment PI are defined in the following table:

Value Char. Value Char. Value Char. Value Char.


00 '0' 10 blank 20 'J' 30 'T'
01 '1' 11 'A' 21 'K' 31 'U'
02 '2' 12 'B' 22 'L' 32 'V'
03 '3' 13 'C' 23 'M' 33 'W'
04 '4' 14 'D' 24 'N' 34 'X'
05 '5' 15 'E' 25 'O' 35 'Y'
06 '6' 16 'F' 26 'P' 36 'Z'
07 '7' 17 'G' 27 'Q' 37 '-'
08 '8' 18 'H' 28 'R' 38 '*'
09 '9' 19 'I' 29 'S'

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 191 of 235

On the Car and Group links, the Dot Matrix PI will only display the “Out Of Service” message when the
car’s position is invalid.
On the Hall link, the DMPI-O parameter specifies when the Dot Matrix PI displays the “Out Of Service”
message.
· Bit E = 0: EHS mode does not display Out Of Service message
· Bit E = 1: EHS mode displays Out Of Service message
· Bit P = 0: PKS mode does not display Out Of Service message
· Bit P = 1: PKS mode displays Out Of Service message
· Bit C = 0: CRL mode does not display Out Of Service message
· Bit C = 1: CRL mode displays Out Of Service message
· Bit I = 0: ISC mode does not display Out Of Service message
· Bit I = 1: ISC mode displays Out Of Service message
· Bit S = 0: INS mode does not display Out Of Service message
· Bit S = 1: INS mode displays Out Of Service message
· Bit F = 0: Car Failed to Start does not display Out Of Service message
· Bit F = 1: Car Failed to Start displays Out Of Service message
Note that on the Hall link the “Out Of Service” message is automatically displayed when the DMOOS
input is active, the car is initializing, the car is correcting, or the car’s position is invalid.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 192 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

Priority Service Operation (EHS, EPS, PPA)


Feature Description
Priority service contains three operations: Emergency Hospital Service, Express Priority Service and
Penthouse Priority Service. Only one of these operations at a time can be configured to execute.
Emergency Hospital Service is initiated by entering a priority call via a switch. The best designated car
allowed to serve this call, answers it after canceling prior demand. The call is available for one to many
calls dependent upon setup. After answering the priority call, car calls can be entered and the door closed
by applying constant pressure to the door close button. The door opens automatically when the car call
demand is served.
Express Priority Service is initiated by entering a priority call via a switch. The best designated car
allowed to serve this call, answers it after all existing car calls are served. The hall calls are reassigned.
The car is available for one call, which upon registration closes the door. The car travel non-stop to the
landing and opens the doors when demand is served.
Penthouse Priority Service acts much like Express Priority Service. The difference being, after the car
serves the priority call, it returns to a defined landing automatically without entering a car call.
These three operations place the car into the EHS operational mode.

Inputs and Outputs


Name I/O# I/O Link Description Active
EHS 358 Input Car Emergency Hospital car switch H
DCB 381 Input Car Door close button H
CEL 388 Output Car Car emergency hospital lamp -
RDCB 403 Input Car Rear door close button H
RCEL 417 Output Car Rear car emergency hospital lamp -
EPL 1292 Output Hall Priority lamp -
FEHC01 - 2007 - Both Group Front priority call button, landing 1 to 80 H
FEHC80 2086
REHC01 - 2247 - Both Group Rear priority call button, landing 1 to 80 H
REHC80 2326
AEPS 2497 Output Group Not Answering priority call lamp -

Installation Parameters
Name Group Description Disable
EN-EPS 6 Priority service type N/A
EHS-T 6 Priotity service timeout N/A
PPA-P 6 Penthouse Priority Position 255

Setup
The correct type of priority service must be defined.
· 0 = Enable emergency hospital service, remain on EHS for one call or for a number of calls
with the optional car switch
· 1 = Enable express priority service
· 2 = Enable emergency hospital service, remain on EHS until no car demand
· 3 = Enable penthouse priority service

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 193 of 235

The EHS-T parameter defines the timout delay before the car reverts to previous operations after
answering an express call and never being used as an express call.
· 5 to 255 = 5 to 255 seconds
If penthouse priority service is required, the PPA-P parameter must be defined.
· 0 to 64 = Landing 0 to 64
· 255 = Disabled
If emergency hospital service is required with a car switch, the EHS input needs to be addressed.
Each car must be specified to serve a priority call at specific landings. This is done through the first
allowed mask setup. The service tool display is shown below.

To allow the car to serve priority calls, the front and/or priority bit
needs to be set as shown below.
To allow priority calls to a specific
landing, the 'E' fields are set to a '1'.
at CUDE CUDE Pk
nn nnn1 nnn1 n

The landings requiring a priority call need to have the corresponding front/rear priority call button
addressed.
The outputs are illuminated under the following conditions:
· The CEL and RCEL lamps illuminate whenever the car is under EHS operation
· The AEPS lamp illuminates when a priority call is not registered and pending
· The EPL lamp is illuminated when the car is under EHS operation

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 194 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

Remote Elevator Monitoring (REM)


Feature Description
For contracts with Remote Elevator Monitoring (REM), several discrete outputs are sent from the OCSS
to the REM controller.

Inputs and Outputs


Name I/O# I/O Link Description Active
BUTS 478 Output Car Car has demand or movement H
CPR 479 Output Car Car not attempting to open doors H
DIR 480 Output Car Car direction H
MF 721 Output Car Lobby lamp H
NORM 722 Output Car Car not on manual control H
OOS 723 Output Car Car out of service H

Installation Parameters
None.

Setup
Address the BUTS, CPR, DIR, MF, NORM, and OOS outputs on the Car Link. These signals must be
fed into the REM controller as discretes.
To achieve the out of service indication for REM systems that do not support the OOS input, the OOS
output from OCSS should be used to drive the POW- REM input. This will place the REM into the
INOP9 state.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 195 of 235

Ring Communications: Adjustable Baud Rate


Feature Description
The ring communications baud rate is selectable between 9600 baud and 19200 baud. The default is
19200 baud.

Inputs and Outputs


None.

Installation Parameters
Name Group Description Disable
R-BAUD 1 Ring communications baud rate N/A

Setup
The R-BAUD parameter defines the baud rate.
· 96 = 9600 baud
· 192 = 19200 baud
Note that all cars in the group must have the same baud rate and after changing the R-BAUD parameter,
the power must be recycled.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 196 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

Ring Communications: Contractible bits


Feature Description
Some of the standard EMS requests are selectable to allow flexibility when a customer requests a non-
standard EMS feature.

Inputs and Outputs


None.

Installation Parameters
None.

Setup
The EMS selectable request parameters can be changed by using the service tool function located by
pressing M,1,3,4,5. Once in this menu, the message subtype, byte and bit are defined. Some of the listed
features have the standard message location, defined by the ring communication ICD, in the EEprom.
These should not be adjusted unless one of the standard features is not to be used at the job site. Note
that some of the group communications are transmitted through the standard requests.

Table: Selectable Feature Requests


Feature Request type Feature type ICD location
Name (subtype, byte, bit)
MOT Standard Group 0, 3, 0
MIT Standard Group 0, 3, 1
SRO Standard Group 0, 3, 5
SAC Standard Group 0, 3, 6
DUPK Standard Group 0, 4, 0
CTL Standard Car 1, 3, 0
PKS Standard Car 1, 3, 1
ISC Standard Car 1, 3, 2
ATT Standard Car 1, 3, 3
CCCR Non-Standard Group ---
HCCR Non-Standard Group ---
SCO Non-Standard Car ---
GFSC Standard Group Unused
SCXA1 Non-Standard Group ---
SCXA2 Non-Standard Group ---
SCXB1 Non-Standard Group ---
SCXB2 Non-Standard Group ---
SCXC Non-Standard Group ---
SCXD Non-Standard Group ---
SCXE Non-Standard Group ---
MGPRO Non-Standard Group ---
This method allows for one request issued by EMS to trigger many features in a car when the desired
feature all share the same subtype, byte and bit information.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 197 of 235

Riot Operation (ROT)


Feature Description
Riot operation brings the car to a defined landing upon activation of the riot input. The car returns non-
stop and open it's door. The car can then be moved by authorized personnel by activating the
independent service switch and running the car as if on independent service operation.
Group riot operation disables all calls below the lobby, inclusive, and the down hall call at the landing
above the lobby. This is different from standard riot operation.

Inputs and Outputs


Name I/O# I/O Link Description Active
RIOTS 1326 Input Hall Riot switch H
GRIOT 1330 Input Hall Group riot switch H

Installation Parameters
Name Group Description Disable
RIOT-P 7 Riot return landing 255

Setup
The RIOT-P parameter must be defined when using the RIOTS input.
· 1 to 64 = landing 1 to 64
· 255 = disabled
Note that if the car is required to be moved, refer to the Independent Service Operation chapter for setup
information.
For group riot operation, the GRIOT input must be addressed. It does not require the RIOT-P parameter.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 198 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

Sabbath Operation (SAB)


Feature Description
Some religious beliefs do not allow work to be performed on the Sabbath, which includes pressing
elevator call buttons. Sabbath operation cycles the designated elevator to the landings specified by the
“S” bits of the Special Masks, without requiring a car or hall call. When the car reaches a terminal
landing, it reverses direction and continues making stops in the opposite direction.

Inputs and Outputs


Name I/O# I/O Link Description Active
SABCK 1393 Input Hall Sabbath operation clock input H

Installation Parameters
Name Group Description Disable
WCO-DT 5 Wildcar and Sabbath operation door time N/A

Setup
The SABCK input must be addressed.
The WCO-DT parameter must be defined.
· 0 to 80 = door time of 8 seconds
· 81 to 255 = door time of 8.1 to 25.5 seconds
The sabbath service landings are defined using the “S” bits of the Special Masks on the Service Tool.
The Allowed Masks at the sabbath landings must allow the car to travel to the landing. At least two
landings must have the “S” bits defined for Sabbath Service to operate properly.
at P O W S H B
xx x x x x x x

The “S” bits may be set to the following values:


0 = Car does not stop at the landing
1 = Open front door at landing during SAB
2 = Open rear door at landing during SAB
3 = Open both doors at landing during SAB

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 199 of 235

Security Options
Feature Description
This section talks about security options that affect most security features.

Inputs and Outputs


Name I/O# I/O Link Description Active
LDOS 727 Input Car Lobby door security override switch H

Installation Parameters
Name Group Description Disable
SEC-O 7 Security Options bitmask N/A

Setup
The SEC-O bitmask parameter defines options for general security:
One of the lobby doors can be selected to override security. Which door is selectable by the
customer and can change by toggling a switch. Enabling this feature is done by setting the L bit:
L bit = 0: Disables lobby door security override
L bit = 1: Enables lobby door security override
When a car stops at a secured landing and opens a door for a passenger, it is because the call
type was not secured. Once the doors close at the secured landing, they are not allow to reopen
at that landing. In many cases though, it may be desirable to allow the door to reopen at a
secured landing. This feature has priority over the D bit feature. Enabling this feature is done
by setting the R bit:
R bit = 0: Disables secured door reopen
R bit = 1: Enables secured door reopen
If a passenger is in a car that stops at a secured landing, it is desirable to not let that passenger
open the door without a call to that landing. It may be desirable to return the car to the lobby
and let that passenger out. This is done when the car has no other demand. Enabling this feature
is done by setting the D bit:
D bit = 0: Disables lobby recall when DOB at secured opening
D bit = 1: Enables lobby recall when DOB at secured opening
The LDOS input is used in conjuntion with the L and D bit options of the SEC-O bitmask parameter:
· LDOS is inactive opens the front door at the lobby
· LDOS is active opens the rear door at the lobby

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 200 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

Selectable Advanced Car Assignment (SACA)


Feature Description
Some installations require additional advanced hall lantern time prior to the car's arrival. The selectable
advanced car assignment feature allows the hall lantern time to be defined for each car in the group. This
also satisfies the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) which requires ten seconds of lantern time for a
hall call stop.

Inputs and Outputs


None.

Installation Parameters
Name Group Description Disable
SACA-T 8 Selectable advanced car assignment time 0

Setup
The SACA-T parameter defines the number of seconds of advanced hall lanterns based in RRT seconds.
· 0 = Disabled
· 1 - 10 = 1 to 10 RRT seconds of advanced warning
· >10 = 10 RRT seconds of advanced warning

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 201 of 235

Separate Hall Button Riser (SRO)


Feature Description
This operation uses two sets of hall buttons known as risers: a primary riser for normal group operation
and a separate riser to provide expeditious service to certain landings during certain periods of the day.
Upon activation, the cars connected to the separate hall button riser serve only the hall calls registered on
the separate hall button riser. All calls on the primary riser are ignored. Cars operating on the separate
hall button riser are not subject to group dispatching features.
To use this feature, the car must not have any rear openings.

Inputs and Outputs


Name I/O# I/O Link Description Active
DCB381 Input Car Door H
close
button
RDCB 403 Input Car Rear door close button H
RUHL01 - 965 - Output Hall Rear up hall lanterns, landing 01 - 80 -
RUHL80 1044
RDHL01 - 1045- Output Hall Rear down hall lanterns, landing 01 - 80 -
RDHL80 1124
SROS 1348 Input Hall Separate hall button riser switch H
RUHB01 - 2087- Input Group Rear up hall buttons, landing 01 - 80 H
RUHB80 2166
RDHB01 - 2167- Input Group Rear down hall buttons, landing 01 -80 H
RDHB80 2248

Installation Parameters
Name Group Description Disable
EN-SHB 5 Enable separate hall button riser bit mask 0

Setup
Separate hall button riser is performed by addressing the rear hall buttons, which upon activation via the
SROS input, operate as front buttons on the separate hall button riser. The Rear Hall Call allowed masks
must be defined for all landings on the cars that are to serve the separate riser demand. Note that Rear
Car Call allowed masks should not be setup, as the Front Car Call allowed masks are used.
The EN-SHB bit mask parameter enables Separate Riser Operation and specifies separate riser options.
· Bit * = 0: Reserved for furture use
· Bit * = 1: Reserved for furture use
· Bit S = 0: Disable Separate Riser Operation
· Bit S = 1: Enable Separate Riser Operation
· Bit L = 0: Hall Lantern Operation Is Enabled During Separate Riser Operation
· Bit L = 1: Hall Lantern Operation Is Disabled During Separate Riser Operation
The DCB and the RDCB inputs must be addressed to the same value.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 202 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

Note that the separate riser hall button addresses must be unique from the primary riser hall button
addresses. No address on the primary riser can be duplicated on the secondary riser. If this is not going
to be the case, refer to the Swing Car Operation chapter to setup up swing car.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 203 of 235

Shuttle Car Operation


Feature Description
Shuttle car operation shall provide express service between two designated landings, typically a principal
entry landing such as a lobby floor and an upper landing with a public floor such as a restaurant,
ballroom, or exhibition hall.
It is desirable, but not required, to provide an even number of shuttle cars for shuttle car operation. The
minimum number of cars in a group must be two. During periods of little or no shuttle demand, at least
half of the cars will park at each of the shuttle terminals.
If a separate hall-button riser is used, button operation will cause the selected car to open its doors to
permit passenger entry.
If the "no-button" option is used, one car will be selected at each landing to park with its doors open and
the hall lantern will be illuminated to indicate that it is a shuttle car.
In either the separate riser or no-button arrangement, registration of a car call will dispatch the car.
When the car is within a given distance (adjustable) of its destination, a car will be dispatched from the
destination landing.
The hours during which shuttle service is provided can be controlled by means of a key switch, clock
input, or through EMS. Lobby signs, illuminated when shuttle service is active, will direct passengers to
the shuttle elevator. Location of the key switch is at the customer's option.

Inputs and Outputs


Name I/O# I/O Link Description Active
SCXL 1316 Output Hall Shuttle car lamp -
SCXA1 2551 Input Group Shuttle car mode A1 activation input H
SCXA2 2552 Input Group Shuttle car mode A2 activation input H
SCXB1 2553 Input Group Shuttle car mode B1 activation input H
SCXB2 2554 Input Group Shuttle car mode B2 activation input H
SCXC 2555 Input Group Shuttle car mode C activation input H
SCXD 2556 Input Group Shuttle car mode D activation input H
SCXE 2557 Input Group Shuttle car mode E activation input H

Installation Parameters
None

Setup

The setup procedure for shuttle car operation requires several parameters to be entered into the shuttle
car EEPROM table. There are five separate modes of shuttle car operation of which two modes can
support up to three sub-modes of operation which allows additional configurations within a group for
shuttle operation. Detailed examples of modes and sub-modes will be covered later in the setup section.
The parameters for shuttle car operation are defined as follows:
Sub-mode Indicates which sub-mode within the given mode the car is to respond to. Note
that all modes can operate in sub-mode 1, and only modes A and B support all
three sub-modes. A value of 1 for the appropriate sub-mode(s) will provide the

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 204 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

desired operations as defined in the table for the respective mode. The
following table indicates which input(s) activates each and/or all sub-modes:

Active Input(s)/Request(s) Sub-mode(s) Activated

SCXA1 Sub-mode 1 in Mode A


SCXA2 Sub-mode 2 in Mode A
SCXA1, SCXA2 Sub-mode 3 in Mode A
SCXB1 Sub-mode 1 in Mode B
SCXB2 Sub-mode 2 in Mode B
SCXB1, SCXB2 Sub-mode 3 in Mode B
SCXC Sub-mode 1 in Mode C
SCXD Sub-mode 1 in Mode D
SCXE Sub-mode 1 in Mode E

Bottom Defines the bottom shuttle position. Value must be >= bottom position and <=
top position.
Top Defines the top shuttle position. Value must be >= bottom position and <= top
position.
Intermittent Indicates position for intermittent stop 1 between the shuttle positions. Value
Stop 1 (IST1) must be > bottom position and < top position.
Intermittent Indicates position for intermittent stop 2 between the shuttle positions. Value
Stop 2 (IST2) must be > bottom position and < top position.
Sub-mode Indicates which shuttle position is the preferred position for the car when
Group 1 shuttle car is activated for sub-mode 1. A value of "1" will set the
preferred (G1) position as the bottom shuttle position, and a value of "2" will set the
preferred position as the top shuttle position.
Sub-mode Indicates which shuttle position is the preferred position for the car when
Group 2 shuttle car is activated for sub-mode 2. A value of "1" will set the
preferred (G2) position as the bottom shuttle position, and a value of "2" will set the
preferred position as the top shuttle position.
Sub-mode Indicates which shuttle position is the preferred position for the car when
Group 3 shuttle car is activated for sub-mode 3. A value of "1" will set the
preferred (G3) position as the bottom shuttle position, and a value of "2" will set the
preferred position as the top shuttle position.
Doors Defines the state of the doors when the car is parked at one of the shuttle
positions. The following table defines the possible values for the
DOORS parameter:

DOORS Value Description

0 Park at the lower and upper shuttle positions with both doors closed.
1 Park at the lower and upper shuttle positions with the front doors opened and the
rear doors closed.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 205 of 235

2 Park at the lower and upper shuttle positions with the front doors closed and the
rear doors opened.
3 Park at the lower and upper shuttle positions with both doors opened.
100 Park at the lower shuttle position with both doors closed and at the upper shuttle
position with both doors closed.
101 Park at the lower shuttle position with both doors closed and at the upper shuttle
position with the front doors opened and the rear doors closed.
102 Park at the lower shuttle position with both doors closed and at the upper shuttle
position with the front doors closed and the rear doors opened.
103 Park at the lower shuttle position with both doors closed and at the upper shuttle
position with both doors opened.
200 Park at the upper shuttle position with both doors closed and at the lower shuttle
position with both doors closed.
201 Park at the upper shuttle position with both doors closed and at the lower shuttle
position with the front doors opened and the rear doors closed.
202 Park at the upper shuttle position with both doors closed and at the lower shuttle
position with the front doors closed and the rear doors opened.
203 Park at the upper shuttle position with both doors closed and at the lower shuttle
position with both doors opened.

Figure 1-1
Hall Calls (HC) Defines whether hall calls are enabled or disabled when shuttle operation is
active. A value of "0" disables hall calls and a value of "1" enables
hall calls.
Dispatch Indicates the distance (number of landings) that a traveling car will be from its
Distance (DX) destination position before the car parked at the destination position is
dispatched to the opposite shuttle position. A good
value for DX would be (Top - Bottom)/2.
Priority Determines the delay time for a one car shuttle that is to be automatically
dispatched. The delay time has a range from 0 to 255 seconds. Note
that for shuttle car operation with intermediate stops, the car will be
immediately dispatched when the door cycle has completed and with only
terminal stops the delay time is used. It should also be pointed out that
this time should be set with two car shuttles in order to prevent the car from
always remaining at one shuttle position when there is no demand.

Example
· Two car shuttle, cars A and B between floors 1 and 16 activated via key switch.
· No intermediate stops.
· Car A will have it's preferred landing at 1, and car B will be 16.
· Hall calls disabled for both cars.
· Both cars are to park with front doors opened.
· Dispatch distance will be 8.
· Priority delay will be 30 seconds.

Setup
The following tables illustrate how this operation would be setup for this example:
Setup for Car A

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 206 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

Mode S S S Bottom Top IST1 IST2 G G G Doors HC DX Priority


1 2 3 1 2 3
A 1 0 0 1 16 255 255 1 0 0 1 0 8 30
B 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
C 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
D 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
E 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Setup for Car B

Mode S S S Bottom Top IST1 IST2 G G G Doors HC DX Priority


1 2 3 1 2 3
A 1 0 0 1 16 255 255 2 0 0 1 0 8 30
B 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
C 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
D 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
E 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

The RSL address for the key switch on the group link would be addressed at SCXA1, I/O #2551.

Example
· Two or four car shuttle as follows:
Cars A & D and/or cars B & C
· All cars will shuttle between floors 2 and 50.
· Cars A and B will have the preferred landing as 1, and cars C and D will be
50. · Two intermediate stops for all cars at landings 4 and 5.
· Hall calls enabled for all cars.
· All cars to park at upper shuttle position with doors opened
and at lower position with doors closed. · Dispatch distance will be 24.
· Priority delay will be 30 seconds.

Setup
The following tables illustrate how this operation would be setup for this example:

Setup for Cars A & D

Mode S S S Bottom Top IST1 IST2 G G G Doors HC DX Priority


1 2 3 1 2 3
A 1 0 1 2 50 4 5 1 1 0 101 1 24 30
B 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 207 of 235

C 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 0


D 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
E 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Setup for Cars B & C

Mode S S S Bottom Top IST1 IST2 G G G Doors HC DX Priority


1 2 3 1 2 3
A 0 1 1 2 50 4 5 0 2 2 101 1 24 30
B 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
C 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
D 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
E 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Note that there are three different combinations of operation. Because of this, the three sub-modes are
used for Mode A. They are as follows:
Mode A - Sub-mode 1 -- Cars A & D, activated by SCXA1
Mode A - Sub-mode 2 -- Cars B & C, activated by SCXA2
Mode A - Sub-mode 3 -- Cars A & D and cars B & C,
activated by SCXA1 and SCXA2.
The RSL addresses for the key switches on the group link would be addressed appropriately at SCXA1
and SCXA2.

Using EMS requests


Shuttle car can be activated using EMS instead of RSL inputs. If this operation is desired from EMS, the
appropriate subtype, byte, and bit data must be setup for the EMS contractible parameters SCXA1,
SCXA2, SCXB1, SCXB2, SCXC, SCXD, and SCXE accordingly.

Service Tool Setup


The shuttle car operation table can be edited using the service tool. For each mode in the table, the
individual data segments are individually accessible. Editing the shuttle car table is done by selecting the
SETUP menu on the service tool.
To move through the modes in the shuttle car table, the GO ON and GO BACK keys are used. To move
through the data segments for each mode, the UP and DOWN keys are used. The service tool interface
is shown below.

Sub-mode 1

MODE A OLD NEW


SUBMODE1=001 000
Indicates whether sub-mode 1 is part of this mode's operation. A value of 1 for this sub-mode
will provide the desired operations defined in the table for this mode.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 208 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

Sub-mode 2

MODE A OLD NEW


SUBMODE2=001 000
Indicates whether sub-mode 2 is part of this mode's operation. A value of 1 for this sub-mode
will provide the desired operations defined in the table for this mode.

Sub-mode 3

MODE A OLD NEW


SUBMODE3=001 000
Indicates whether sub-mode 3 is part of this mode's operation. A value of 1 for this sub-mode
will provide the desired operations defined in the table for this mode.

Bottom

MODE A OLD NEW


BOTTOM =255 000
Defines the bottom shuttle position. Value must be >= bottom position and <= top position.

Top

MODE A OLD NEW


TOP =255 000
Defines the top shuttle position. Value must be >= bottom position and <= top position.

Intermittent Stop 1

MODE A OLD NEW


IST 1 =255 000
Indicates position for intermittent stop 1 between the shuttle positions. Value must be > bottom
position and < top position.

Intermittent Stop 2

MODE A OLD NEW


IST 2 =255 000

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 209 of 235

Indicates position for intermittent stop 2 between the shuttle positions. Value must be > bottom
position and < top position.

Sub-mode Group 1

MODE A OLD NEW


SCX GRP1 =001 000
Indicates which shuttle position is the preferred position for the car when shuttle car is activated
for sub-mode 1. A value of "1" will set the preferred position as the bottom shuttle position, and
a value of "2" will set the preferred position as the top position.

Sub-mode Group 2

MODE A OLD NEW


SCX GRP2 =001 000
Indicates which shuttle position is the preferred position for the car when shuttle car is activated
for sub-mode 2. A value of "1" will set the preferred position as the bottom shuttle position, and
a value of "2" will set the preferred position as the top position.

Sub-mode Group 3

MODE A OLD NEW


SCX GRP3 =001 000
Indicates which shuttle position is the preferred position for the car when shuttle car is activated
for sub-mode 3. A value of "1" will set the preferred position as the bottom shuttle position, and
a value of "2" will set the preferred position as the top position.

Doors

MODE A OLD NEW


DOORS =000 000
Defines the state of the doors when the car is parked at one of the shuttle positions. See Figure
1-1 for possible values and descriptions.

Hall Calls

MODE A OLD NEW


HCALLS =000 000
Defines whether hall calls are enabled or disabled when shuttle operation is active. A value of
"0" disables hall calls and a value of "1" enables hall calls.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 210 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

Dispatch Distance

MODE A OLD NEW


DSP DX =000 000
Indicates the distance (number of landings) that a traveling car will be from its destination
position before the car parked at the destination position is dispatched to the opposite shuttle
position. A good value for this parameter would be (Top - Bottom)/2.

Priority

MODE A OLD NEW


PRIORTY =000 000
Determines the delay time for a one car shuttle that is to be automatically dispatched. The delay
time has a range from 0 to 255 seconds.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 211 of 235

Speech Synthesis
Feature Description
Equipment is furnished to allow an audible announcement of the name of the next landing at which the
elevator will stop, and the committed direction of travel. Several advisory messages shall also be
available to indicate the need for the elevator to be on special services, passenger delay, and other
informational messages.

Inputs and Outputs


Name I/O# I/O Link Description Active
SSMRL 346 Output Car Speech module relay -
SSMO 405 Output Car Speech data line 1 -
SSM1 406 Output Car Speech data line 2 -
SSM2 407 Output Car Speech data line 3 -
SSM3 408 Output Car Speech data line 4 -
SSM4 409 Output Car Speech data line 5 -
SSM5 410 Output Car Speech data line 6 -
SSMB 411 Input Car Speech module busy signal H
SSMR 412 Output Car Speech module reset signal -
SSMS 413 Output Car Speech module start signal -
SSM6 425 Output Car Speech data line 7 -

Installation Parameters
None

Setup
The phrases to be spoken at each landing are contracted on a job basis, and incorporated into the baseline.
Figure 1-1 shows the standard speech phrases allowed with the Okidata speech board.
If additional or special phrases are required, the special phrases are inserted in the spare phrase locations.
Changes must also be made to the data stored on the Okidata speech board for these situations.
Ensure that the base RSL address listed on the wiring diagrams of the start output (SSMS) is greater than
the base RSL address of the data output bits (SSM0 - SSM6). This is necessary due to a software change
to improve the speech performance with the AAA30005AAG baseline.

00 (00H) - (no operation) 23 (17H) - Fifty 46 (2EH) - Going up

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 212 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

01 (01H) - First 24 (18H) - Plaza 47 (2FH) - Going down


02 (02H) - Second 25 (19H) - Ground 48 (30H) - Please stand clear of the closing door
03 (03H) - Third 26 (1AH) - Twentieth 49 (31H) - This elevator
04 (04H) - Fourth 27 (1BH) - Floor 50 (32H) - is full
05 (05H) - Fifth 28 (1CH) - Basement 51 (33H) - Please take the next elevator
06 (06H) - Sixth 29 (1DH) - Thirtieth 52 (34H) - Do not be alarmed
07 (07H) - Seventh 30 (1EH) - Fortieth 53 (35H) - We are experiencing
08 (08H) - Eighth 31 (1FH) - Fiftieth 54 (36H) - a temporary power interruption
09 (09H) - Ninth 32 (20H) - Story 55 (37H) - minor technical difficulties
10 (0AH) - Tenth 33 (21H) - Garage 56 (38H) - is needed for an emergency
11 (0BH) - Eleventh 34 (22H) - Mezzanine 57 (39H) - Please exit when the doors open
12 (0CH) - Twelfth 35 (23H) - Level 58 (3AH) - You are pressing...buttons required
13 (0DH) - Thirteenth 36 (24H) - Lobby 59 (3BH) - To summon assistance
14 (0EH) - Fourteenth 37 (25H) - Restaurant 60 (3CH) - Concourse
15 (0FH) - Fifteenth 38 (26H) - Lower 61 (3DH) - Please push the alarm button
16 (10H) - Sixteenth 39 (27H) - Main 62 (3EH) - Good morning
17 (11H) - Seventeenth 40 (28H) - Cafeteria 63 (3FH) - Penthouse
18 (12H) - Eighteenth 41 (29H) - Parking
19 (13H) - Nineteenth 42 (2AH) - One 64 - 126 (spare)
20 (14H) - Twenty 43 (2BH) - Two 127 Test sequence initiator
21 (15H) - Thirty 44 (2CH) - Three
22 (16H) - Forty 45 (2DH) - Upper

Figure 1-1
Service Tool Setup
The speech messages for each landing are stored in EEPROM which allows easy configuration using the
service tool.
The speech message configuration selected is listed under the "SETUP" service tool menu. When you
select it, a display similar to the following illustrations will appear.
Phrase A

SPEECH OLD NEW


SSM nnnA = aa bb
Up to four phrases can be assigned to each floor (specified by nnn). Phrase A would be the first
phrase enunciated by the special board when the car arrives at the landing. If no phrase is
desired, the phrase value should be "00".
Phrase B

SPEECH OLD NEW


SSM nnnB = aa bb
Up to four phrases can be assigned to each floor (specified by nnn). Phrase B would be the
second phrase enunciated by the special board when the car arrives at the landing. If no phrase
is desired, the phrase value should be "00".

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 213 of 235

Phrase C

SPEECH OLD NEW


SSM nnnC = aa bb
Up to four phrases can be assigned to each floor (specified by nnn). Phrase C would be the third
phrase enunciated by the special board when the car arrives at the landing. If no phrase is
desired, the phrase value should be "00".
Phrase D

SPEECH OLD NEW


SSM nnnD = aa bb
Up to four phrases can be assigned to each floor (specified by nnn). Phrase D would be the
fourth phrase enunciated by the special board when the car arrives at the landing. If no phrase is
desired, the phrase value should be "00".
As shown in the above illustrations, each landing can have up to 4 speech phrases assigned. When the
car arrives at a landing, the speech board will enunciate the specified phrases. Through the service tool,
the phrases are referred to as phrases A thru D. To select a particular phrase, the phrase number should
be determined from the table in Figure 1-1. If a landing is not going to use all four phrases, the unused
phrases should be assigned a value of "00".
To move through the phrases for a particular landing, the GO ON and GO BACK keys are used. To
move through the landings, the UP and DOWN keys are used.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 214 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

Split Group Operation


Feature Description
Split Group Operation (SGO) allows a single elevator bank to be divided into independently operating
groups, without the extensive hardware changes required with Swing Car Operation.
SGO will support up to three different elevator configurations. The elevator configurations are activated
via three inputs on the Group Link (SGO1, SGO2, and SGO3). Each elevator configuration can divide an
elevator bank into as many as eight distinct groups. Elevator configurations are specified via three
installation parameter bit masks (SGO-C1, SGO-C2, and SGO-C3).
During SGO, messages from all subsystems are transmitted around the ring. However, each OCSS will
only process the messages from OCSSs in their own group, as specified by the current SGO elevator
configuration.
Each group within a configuration needs at least one hall button riser if it will be responsible for
processing hall calls. NOTE THAT SWITCH OVER MODULES MUST BE CONFIGURED TO KEEP
THE RISER WITHIN ITS SGO GROUP IF A CAR IS TO BECOME INACTIVE!!!
Each group will perform ALL group functions independently, except for Emergency Power Operation. If
the elevator bank enters Emergency Power Operation, Split Group Operation will be disabled until
normal building power is restored.

Inputs and Outputs


Name I/O# I/O Link Description Active
SGO1 2513 Input Group SGO Configuration 1 Keyswitch H
SGO2 2514 Input Group SGO Configuration 2 Keyswitch H
SGO3 2515 Input Group SGO Configuration 3 Keyswitch H
SGOL1 2516 Output Group SGO Configuration 1 Lamp -
SGOL2 2517 Output Group SGO Configuration 2 Lamp -
SGOL3 2518 Output Group SGO Configuration 3 Lamp -

Installation Parameters
Name Group Description Disable
SGO-C1 5 SGO Configuration 1 Mask 0
SGO-C2 5 SGO Configuration 2 Mask 0
SGO-C3 5 SGO Configuration 3 Mask 0

Setup
Up to three SGO configurations can be defined with the SGO-C1, SGO-C2, and SGO-C3 installation
parameters. Each of these parameters is a bit mask indicating the cars in the group when a specific SGO
configuration is activated, as follows:
· Bit A: If one, car A is part of the group. If zero, car A is not part of the group.
· Bit B: If one, car B is part of the group. If zero, car B is not part of the group.
· Bit C: If one, car C is part of the group. If zero, car C is not part of the group.
· Bit D: If one, car D is part of the group. If zero, car D is not part of the group.
· Bit E: If one, car E is part of the group. If zero, car E is not part of the group.
· Bit F: If one, car F is part of the group. If zero, car F is not part of the group.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 215 of 235

· Bit G: If one, car G is part of the group. If zero, car G is not part of the group.
· Bit H: If one, car H is part of the group. If zero, car H is not part of the group.
A specific SGO configuration is activated with its corresponding input (SGO1, SGO2, or SGO3). If more
than one of these inputs is active at the same time, SGO1 will have the highest priority and SGO3 will
have the lowest priority.

Example
A bank of elevators consists of eight cars. Two of the cars (G and H) are service cars which normally run
in duplex mode, leaving six cars (A - F) to serve the passenger traffic. During busy periods, all eight cars
(A - H) are combined into a single group to better serve the traffic.
This can be implemented using Split group Operation with a single configuration. Cars A - F should
have the SGO-C1 parameter set to the following value:
SGO-C1 ABCDEFGH
11111100
Cars G and H should have the SGO-C1 parameter set to the following value:
SGO-C1 ABCDEFGH
00000011
When the SGO1 input is inactive, the bank of elevators will consists of an eight car group (A - H). When
the SGO1 input is active, the elevator bank will function as two separate groups: (A - F) and (G and H).

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 216 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

Stuck Button
Feature Description
The stuck button feature ignores the stuck button to allow a car to serve other demand more efficiently.
At defined time intervals, the stuck button is registered as demand to bring the car to the stuck button
landing to serve any demand that may be present. This is very important in-case the stuck button occurs
at the lobby landing.

Inputs and Outputs


None.

Installation Parameters
Name Group Description Disable
SB-DLY 1 Stuck button processing delay N/A

Setup
The SB-DLY parameter defines the time delay before re-registering a stuck button.
· 0 to 255 = process a stuck button every 0 to 255 seconds

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 217 of 235

Swing Car Operation


Feature Description
Through an input, a multi-car group answering a single hall riser can be split into two separate groups,
each answering a different hall button riser. The two groups operate independently, using RSR
dispatching techniques to answer calls in either group. The group the cars are normally attached to is
referred to as the default group, while the new group is referred to as the swing car group.
When swing car operation is requested, the cars or cars that are part of the swing car group continue to
answer car calls, but have hall calls reassigned. When each car assigned to the swing car group has no
demand, all assigned cars are removed from the default group to make the swing car group. A car should
never carry calls between groups.
The cars in the swing car group can be preprogrammed to serve a different set of landings from the
default group. If swing car operation is requested and the car is not at a landing served by the swing car
group, the car moves to swing car landing before entering the swing car group.
If a car is in a swing car group with calls pending when the swing car request is canceled, the car
continues to answer car calls until no demand. Once all swing cars have no demand, they re-enter the
default group, not carrying any call between the two groups.
The swing car group acts as a separate group in all respects for any group related features, including
emergency power and fire service operations.

Inputs and Outputs


Name I/O# I/O Link Description Active
SCOC 430 Input Car Swing car operation request H
SCOH 1358 Input Hall Swing car operation request H
SCOWA 1359 Input Hall Reserved -
SCOK1H 1360 Output Hall Ring re-connection relay -
SCOK2H 1361 Output Hall Ring re-connection relay -
SCOK3H 1363 Output Hall Bypass swing car for default group -
SCOK4H 1364 Output Hall Connect swing car hall button riser to swing car -
SCOK5H 1365 Output Hall Bypass swing car for swing car group -
SCOG 2558 Input Group Swing car operation request H
SCOK1G 2559 Output Group Ring re-connection relay -
SCOK2G 2560 Output Group Ring re-connection relay -
SCOK3G 2561 Output Group Bypass swing car for default group -
SCOK4G 2562 Output Group Connect swing car hall button riser to swing car -
SCOK5G 2563 Output Group Bypass swing car for swing car group -

Installation Parameters
Name Group Description Disable
SCOTYP 5 Enable swing car operation 255

Setup
The SCOTYP parameter enables swing car operation.
· 0 = enable swing car relays on hall link

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 218 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

· 1 = enable swing car relays on group link


· 255 = disabled
The swing car mask must be defined. If the swing car group is to serve the same landings as the default
group, the swing car mask is identical to the allowed mask. However, if the swing car group is going to
serve a different set of landings than the default group, the swing car mask must reflect these differences.
The service tool display is shown below.

The swing car allowed mask defines the calls available to this car
when it is part of the swing car group. The format is the same as
the allowed mask.

landing front calls


rear calls

at CUDE CUDE
01 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1

The outputs SCOK1H - SCOK5H, for hall link, or SCOK1G - SCOK5G, for group link, need to be
addressed to switch the ring communications for the swing car group. Note that only the first car in the
swing car group controls the ring communications switching.
The request inputs SCOC, SCOH and SCOG must be addressed for every car to be in the swing car group
to operate correctly.
The hall buttons on the swing car hall button riser must be addressed identically to the default group hall
button riser. It is acceptable for the swing car hall button riser to have more hall button addressed than
the default group riser, since the default group allowed mask will not allow those calls.
If either group has a different top landing, the TOP parameter must be set to the highest value among all
cars. This allows the cars to serve all landing in both groups.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 219 of 235

Transfer Floor Service (TFS)


Feature Description
The transfer floor is a common landing usually is the top landing of the low-rise elevator group and the
first landing above the lobby of the high-rise elevator group. To prevent service delays due to passengers
traveling between landings of different elevator groups:
· Only the up hall button is allowed for the high-rise group at the transfer floor, preventing a
down traveling car from stopping.
· The transfer floor car button in each of the high-rise cars is allowed only when the car is
traveling in the down direction, preventing passenger from taking the high-rise group to the
transfer floor and then taking the low-rise group down to the real destination.
Two transfer floor configuration are supported: a permanent configuration where the transfer floor is
active at all times and a conditional configuration where the transfer floor is activated for peak traffic
conditions
For very large buildings, the high-rise group may have two transfer floor landings.

Inputs and Outputs


Name I/O# I/O Link Description Active
TFK 2539 Input Group Transfer floor service input H
TFL 2540 Output Group Transfer floor service lamp -

Installation Parameters
Name Group Description Disable
TFPOS1 2 Transfer floor service position 1 255
TFPOS2 2 Transfer floor service position 2 255

Setup
The TFPOS1 and TFPOS2 parameters define a transfer floor landing.
· 1 to 64 = landing 1 to 64
· 255 = disabled
The transfer floor position is usually the highest landing where the low-rise and high-rise groups both
stop. The TFK input must be addressed for the conditional operation to be used. This allows a clock to
control when transfer floor service is in effect.
The down hall button at the transfer floor of the low-rise group must be disabled during this operation.
At this time, Group Generic Security should be used to disable the hall button.
The TFL output is active when the feature is enabled and in use.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 220 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

Some setup examples follow:


Example 1

In this configuration, passengers travelling from a low rise landing can access
the upper landings by transferring to the high-rise group at the 6th floor.
To minimize service delays, the down hall button for the high-rise, 6th
floor is not allowed to operate. Additionally, the high-rise cars have the
6th floor car call button disabled as the car travels in the up direction.
9
8
Low-rise: No setup required.
7
6 6
High-rise: TFPOS1 = 2, because floor 6 is the 2nd landing of the high-rise.
5
TFK = 01-0 if permanent, an address if conditional.
4
EZ
3
2
1 1

Example 2

In this configuration, passengers travelling from the low-rise or nid-rise


14
can access high-rise landings at their corresponding transfer floor. To
13
minimize service delays, the 6th floor and 11th floor down hall button
12
are disabled in the high-rise. Each high-rise car has it's 6th and 11th
11 11 floor car button disabled in the up direction.
10
9
EZ
8 Low-rise: No setup required.
7
mid-rise: No setup required.
6 6 6
5 5 High-rise: TFPOS1 = 2, because floor 6 is the 2nd landing of the high-rise.
4 4
EZ TFPOS2 = 3, because floor 11 is the 3rd landing of the high rise.
3 3
TFK = 01-0 if permanent, an address if conditional.
2 2
1 1 1

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 221 of 235

Vacuum Flourescent Speech Board (VFSB)


Feature Description
The Vacuum Flouresent Speech Board (VFSB) is used to drive a position indicator. The speech board
has battery backup capabilities, thus remembering the car’s position during a power interruption. The
board tracks position by counting landings and resetting at terminals. The speech interface is not
implemented.

Inputs and Outputs


Name I/O# I/O Link Description Active
VFSBT 472 Output Car Vacuum Flourescent Speech Board top -
VFSBB 473 Output Car Vacuum Flourescent Speech Board bottom -
VFSBU 474 Output Car Vacuum Flourescent Speech Board up -
VFSBD 475 Output Car Vacuum Flourescent Speech Board down -

Installation Parameters
None.

Setup
Each of the four outputs must be addressed.

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 222 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

Wild Car Operation (WCO)


Feature Description
Wild car operation is activated when the hall link communications are failed and the wild car switch is
active. Each car stops at defined landings, in a defined direction, to serve would-be hall demand. At
least two cars should serve each landing to help reduce the passenger waiting time, and all cars should
serve the lobby landing.
When the hall link fails, the car enters the Hall Button Protection (HBP) operation mode, which returns
the cars to a defined landing. The group then automatically enters wild car operation if the switch is
defaulted active, or remains on hall button protection operation until the switch is manually activated.
For more information about hall button protection operation, refer to that chapter.

Inputs and Outputs


Name I/O# I/O Link Description Active
WCOS 1327 Input Hall Wild car operation switch H

Installation Parameters
Name Group Description Disable
WCOTYP 5 Wild car operation type N/A
WCO-DT 5 Wild car operation door time N/A

Setup
If the operation is to be automatic, the WCOS parameter needs to be defaulted on. Otherwise, for manual
wild car activation, the WCOS input needs to be addressed.
The WCO-DT parameter must be defined.
· 0 to 80 = door time of 8 seconds
· 81 to 255 = door time of 8.1 to 25.5 seconds
The WCOTYP parameter defines the car direction required for stopping at designated landings.
· 0 = The car stops in both directions
· 1 = The car stops in the up direction
· 2 = The car stops in the down direction
The wild car landings are defined using the “W” bits of the Special Masks on the Service Tool.
at P O W S H B
xx x x x x x x

The “W” bits may be set to the following values:


0 = Car does not stop at the landing
1 = Open front door at landing during WCO
2 = Open rear door at landing during WCO
3 = Open both doors at landing during WCO

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 223 of 235

Index:

-#-

# CRWD, 47

-%-

% CRWD, 47

-A-

AACK, 14
AAL, 14, 19
ACSC, 15
ACSH, 15
ADA-T, 13
ADS-EN, 51
AEPS, 21, 191
ALBI, 14
ALBO, 14, 19
AMF, 74
AMF-P, 74
ANND01 - ANND80, 17
ANNU01 - ANNU80, 17
ANNU-T, 17
ANS, 16
ARD, 179
ARD-P, 179
ARDTYP, 179
ARL, 17, 19, 128
ASL, 109
ASL2, 109
ASL2-C, 110, 166
ASL2-P, 110, 166
ASL-CK, 110, 166
ASL-P, 110, 166
ATK, 17
ATT, 17
ATTD(ISD), 17
ATTU(ISU), 17

-B-

BATT, 19
BEP, 86, 88, 91, 94, 96, 98, 101
BOTTOM, 164
BPZ-EN, 183
BPZ-MN, 183
BUTS, 193
BUZ, 109, 128
BYPASS, 109

-C-

CB-TYP, 162

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 224 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

CCBL, 29
CCBLC, 29
CC-DT, 64
CC-LPT, 147
CCOC, 27
CCOH, 27
CCRCCC, 25, 31
CCRCCH, 25, 31
CCRCHH, 26
CCTL, 29
CCTLC, 29
CDDL, 148
CDGD, 54, 148
CDGU, 54, 148
CDLD, 19, 54, 148
CDLU, 19, 54, 148
CDML, 19, 54, 148
CEL, 19, 54, 191
CEQRS, 74
CFT-NT, 22
CFT-P, 22
CFTS, 21, 32
CHCC, 140
CHCS, 140
CHMI, 148
CHMU, 148
CHN-A, 39
CHN-AT, 39
CHN-B, 39
CHN-C, 39
CHN-D, 39
CHN-DT, 39
CHN-E, 39
CHN-EA, 39
CHN-EN, 38
CHN-F, 39
CHN-G, 39
CHN-H, 39
CHNL, 21, 38
CHN-LD, 39
CHN-O, 39
CHNRQ, 38
CHN-ST, 39
CHN-T, 39
CHN-T1, 39
CHN-T2, 39
CHN-T3, 39
CHN-T4, 39
CHN-T5, 39
CHN-T6, 39
CHN-T7, 39
CHN-T8, 39
CNL, 183, 186
CNL-MN, 183, 186
CPC01 - CPC80, 33

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 225 of 235

CPC-O, 33
CPR, 193
CRIC01 - CRIC80, 25, 31
CRIG01 - CRIG80, 138
CRIH01 - CRIH80, 26
CRWDF1, 47
CRWDF2, 47
CRWDF3, 47
CRWDF4, 47
CRWDF5, 47
CSA1, 34
CSA2, 34
CSA3, 34
CSA4, 34
CSA5, 34
CSA6, 34
CSAC, 34
CSAK, 34
CSAL, 19, 34
CTL, 37
CTLL, 21, 37
CTL-O, 37
CTL-P, 37
CUDL, 148
CUML, 19, 54, 148
CWDS1I1, 47
CWDS1I2, 47
CWDS1I3, 47
CWDS2I1, 47
CWDS2I2, 47
CWDS2I3, 47
CWDS3I1, 47
CWDS3I2, 47
CWDS3I3, 47
CWDS4I1, 47
CWDS4I2, 47
CWDS4I3, 47
CWDS5I1, 47
CWDS5I2, 47
CWDS5I3, 47

-D-

DCB, 17, 54, 58, 103, 191


DCP-T, 49
DDOS, 50
DDOSC, 50
DDSR1, 109, 121
DDSR2, 109, 121
DEECR, 109, 121
DESBR, 109, 121
DFD, 50
DHB, 54, 58
DHB-T, 58
DIR, 193

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 226 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

DISB, 14
DISL, 14, 21
DISTBZ, 53
DISTC, 53
DISTL, 21, 53
DISTRS, 53
DLSC, 59
DLSH, 59
DMD, 21
DMOOS, 189
DPC, 160
DRD, 50
DRES, 14
DSGSR, 109, 121
DTC-O, 60
DTC-T, 60
DTO-O, 63
DTP, 21, 60, 63
DWL, 164
DWL-NT, 164

-E-

EFK, 109
EFKB, 109
EFO, 109
EFO-CK, 110, 166
EFO-DC, 110
EFO-P, 110, 166
EFS, 110, 121, 166
EFS-CK, 110, 121, 166
EHS, 191
EHS-T, 191
ELDCC1, 77
ELDCC2, 77
ELDCC3, 77
ELDCC4, 77
ELDCF1, 77
ELDCF2, 77
ELDCF3, 77
ELDCF4, 77
ELDFD, 77
ELDHC1, 77
ELDHC2, 77
ELDHC3, 77
ELDHC4, 77
ELDHF1, 77
ELDHF2, 77
ELDHF3, 77
ELDHF4, 77
ELDOK, 77
ELD-T, 77
ELDTD, 77
ELZ-P, 183
EMKH, 85

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 227 of 235

EMKL, 19, 84, 85


EMS-O, 105
EMS-XC, 105
EMT, 84
EMTL, 84, 85
EMT-P, 84, 85
EN-CCO, 28
EN-CK, 22, 24
EN-CON, 45
EN-CRC, 25, 30, 31
EN-CRH, 26
EN-DDO, 163
EN-EMO, 162
EN-EPS, 191
EN-HCR, 138
EN-HLC, 148
ENMDSG, 162
EN-NDG, 167
EN-PMO, 62
EN-SFR, 128
EN-SHB, 200
EN-UCB, 160
EN-XLT, 154, 168
EPCAR1, 86, 89, 94, 96, 98, 101
EPCAR2, 86, 89, 94, 96, 98, 101
EPCARS, 86, 89, 94, 96, 98, 101
EPL, 19, 191
EPMANC, 86, 89, 94, 96, 98, 101
EPMOV, 173
EPO-DC, 86, 89, 91, 94, 96, 98, 101
EPO-O, 87, 89, 91, 94, 96, 98, 101
EPO-P, 86, 89, 91, 94, 96, 98, 101
EPR, 21
EPRCR1, 87, 89, 94, 96, 98, 101
EPRCR2, 87, 89, 94, 96, 98, 101
EPRCR3, 87, 89, 94, 96, 98, 101
EPRCR4, 87, 89, 94, 96, 99, 101
EPRCR5, 87, 89, 94, 97, 99, 101
EPRCR6, 87, 89, 94, 97, 99, 101
EPRCR7, 87, 89, 94, 97, 99, 102
EPRCR8, 87, 89, 95, 97, 99, 102
EPRL, 86, 88, 91, 94, 96, 98, 101
EPW, 21, 86, 88, 94, 96, 98, 101
EPWL, 91
EQCW, 74
EQL, 19, 74
EQMS, 74
EQMS-L, 74
EQMS-U, 74
EQOTYP, 74
EQS, 74
EQSC, 74
ERL, 128
ESB-XHC, 104
ESH, 121

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 228 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

ESK, 121
ESRUN, 121
EZ1BOT, 106
EZ1DLY, 106
EZ1RSR, 106
EZ1TOP, 106
EZ2BOT, 106
EZ2DLY, 106
EZ2RSR, 106
EZ2TOP, 106
EZ3BOT, 106
EZ3DLY, 106
EZ3RSR, 106
EZ3TOP, 106
EZ-LFT, 106
EZ-RGT, 106

-F-

FCCB01 - FCCB80, 54, 173


FDFC, 173
FDHB01 - FDHB80, 54, 65, 173
FDHL, 21, 162
FDHL01 - FDHL80, 54
FDL, 17, 19, 128
FDLD, 17, 19, 128
FDLU, 17, 19, 128
FDO, 173
FDTO-T, 63
FEHC01 - FEHC80, 54, 191
FESP1C, 107
FESP1G, 107
FESP1H, 107
FESP2C, 107
FESP2G, 107
FESP2H, 107
FESP3C, 107
FESP3G, 107
FESP3H, 107
FESP4C, 107
FESP4G, 107
FESP4H, 107
FESP5C, 107
FESP5G, 107
FIELD1, 107
FIELD2, 107
FIELD3, 107
FIELD4, 107
FIELD5, 107
FIELD6, 107
FIELD7, 107
FKL1, 21, 109
FKL2, 21, 109
FLK-T, 157
FNDG, 173

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 229 of 235

FREV, 173
FSBPL1, 21, 109
FSBPL2, 21, 109
FSIILC, 19, 121
FSIILH, 21, 121
FSKTYP, 110, 121
FSL, 19, 54, 109, 128
FSR, 21, 109, 128
FUHB01 - FUHB80, 54, 65, 173
FUHL, 21, 162
FUHL01 - FUHL80, 54
FZP-1B, 186
FZP-1T, 186
FZP-2B, 186
FZP-2T, 186
FZP-3B, 186
FZP-3T, 186
FZP-4B, 186
FZP-4T, 186
FZP-5B, 186
FZP-5T, 186
FZP-6B, 186
FZP-6T, 186
FZP-7B, 186
FZP-7T, 186
FZP-8B, 186
FZP-8T, 186
FZP-EN, 186
FZPMSK, 186

-G-

GBEP, 86, 88, 91, 94, 96, 98, 101


GCB-EN, 51
GCCO, 27
GCES, 121
GEPN, 86, 88, 94, 96, 98, 101
GEPO, 86, 88, 94, 96, 98, 101
GEQRS, 74
GFSL1-60, 21, 109, 128
GMIT, 38, 157, 173
GMOT, 173
GNGDLY, 148
GNP, 86, 88, 91, 94, 96, 98, 101
GNP2, 86, 88, 94, 96, 98, 101
GRIOT, 196
GROUP, 164
GRPFBK, 137
GRPTST, 137
GSAK, 34
GSAL, 21, 34
GSMAST, 130
GT, 86, 88, 94, 96, 98, 101

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 230 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

-H-

HBP-O, 137
HBP-P, 137
HB-TYP, 162
HC_DT, 64
HCCO, 139
HCOC, 139
HCOG, 139
HCRC, 30, 138
HDDL, 19, 148
HDML, 21, 54, 148
HDOB, 109
HL-SET, 148
HUDL, 19, 148
HUML, 21, 54, 148

-I-

IGDSTM, 86, 89, 94, 96, 98, 101


IGEPO, 86, 89, 94, 96, 98, 101
INLC, 19, 173
INLH, 19, 128, 141
INVERT, 142
ISC, 141
ISCL, 21, 128, 141
ISD, 141
ISS, 141
ISSH, 141
IST-P, 15
ISU, 141
ITLC, 19, 38, 157
ITLH, 21, 38, 157

-L-

LDOS, 198
LDR, 152
LFC, 151
LNSL, 173
LOBBY, 164
LOB-T, 64
LPT, 147
LR, 151
LR-T, 151
LW10, 72
LW110, 72
LW30, 72
LW50, 72
LW80, 72

-M-

MCSS-O, 59, 72

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 231 of 235

MF, 193
MG-DLY, 70
MGPL, 21, 70
MG-PRO, 71
MG-TIM, 69, 70
MIT-LD, 157, 160
MIT-MN, 157
MIT-MX, 157
MIT-O, 157
MIT-ST, 157
MIT-T, 157
MOT-T, 160
MOVD, 173
MOVU, 173
MREFO, 109

-N-

NDG-T, 167
NORM, 193
NORMLT, 21
NSB, 17
NSLC, 17, 19, 128
NSLH, 17, 19, 128
NUG, 91
NUSD, 91

-O-

OLS, 19, 128, 175


OOS, 193
OOS1B, 21
OOS1M, 21
OOS2B, 21
OOS2M, 21
OOS-A, 173
OOS-B, 173
OOS-C, 173
OOS-D, 173
OOS-E, 173
OOS-F, 173
OOS-G, 173
OOS-H, 173
OTLC, 19, 160
OTLH, 21, 160

-P-

PFLH, 91
PI-C, 189
PI-G, 189
PI-H, 189
PKL, 20, 176
PKS, 37
PKS2, 176

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 232 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

PKS-O, 176
PKS-P, 176
PKSTYP, 37
PPA-P, 191
PRKDLY, 181
PRKLT, 21, 37
PSC, 86, 88, 94, 96, 98, 101
PTC, 86, 88, 94, 96, 98, 101
PWRXFR, 86, 89, 94, 96, 98, 101

-R-

RAND-C, 23
RAND-H, 23
RB, 121
R-BAUD, 194
RCB, 162
RCB-NO, 164
RCCB01 - RCCB80, 56, 173
RCCOC, 140
RCDDL, 19, 148
RCDGD, 56, 148
RCDGU, 56, 148
RCDLD, 19, 56, 148
RCDLU, 19, 56, 148
RCEL, 19, 56, 191
RCHMI, 148
RCHMU, 148
RCRIC01 - RCRIC80, 25, 31
RCRIG01 - RCRIG80, 138
RCRIH01 - RCRIH80, 26
RCUDL, 19, 148
RDCB, 56, 58, 103, 191, 200
RDFC, 173
RDHB, 56, 58
RDHB01 - RDHB80, 56, 65, 173, 200
RDHL, 21, 162
RDHL01 - RDHL80, 56, 200
RDO, 173
RDSP-T, 51
RDTO-T, 63
RDWL, 164
REFK, 109
REFKB, 109
REHC01 - REHC80, 56, 191
REVCNT, 150
REV-DT, 64
RFSL, 19, 56, 109, 128
RIOT-P, 196
RIOTS, 196
RNDG, 173
ROLS, 19, 128, 175
RREV, 173
RSDB, 164
RSLCFG, 72

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 233 of 235

RSTC, 19
RUHB01 - RUHB80, 56, 65, 173, 200
RUHL, 21, 162
RUHL01 - RUHL80, 56, 200

-S-

SABCK, 197
SACA-T, 199
SAC-D1, 34
SAC-D2, 34
SAC-D3, 34
SACTYP, 34
SAR-DR, 31
SAR-P, 30, 31
SB-DLY, 215
SCOC, 216
SCOG, 216
SCOH, 216
SCOK1G, 216
SCOK1H, 216
SCOK2G, 216
SCOK2H, 216
SCOK3G, 216
SCOK3H, 216
SCOK4G, 216
SCOK4H, 216
SCOK5G, 216
SCOK5H, 216
SCOTYP, 216
SCOWA, 216
SCXA1, 202
SCXA2, 202
SCXB1, 202
SCXB2, 202
SCXC, 202
SCXD, 202
SCXE, 202
SCXL, 202
SDB, 164
SEC-O, 130, 198
SESL, 19, 121, 128
SES-O, 110, 121
SESOVR, 110
SESPRO, 71, 74, 121
SES-R, 121
SF_EPO, 86, 89, 94, 96, 98, 101
SGO1, 213
SGO2, 213
SGO3, 213
SGO-C1, 213
SGO-C2, 213
SGO-C3, 213
SGOL1, 213
SGOL2, 213

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Document 51395 Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Engineering Center
Page 234 of 235 Feature Setup Document Farmington

SGOL3, 213
SIMPLX, 188
SMKTYP, 110
SPB-NT, 164
SPL, 21, 86, 88, 94, 96, 98, 101
SPTL, 21
SROS, 200
SSM1, 210
SSM2, 210
SSM3, 210
SSM4, 210
SSM5, 210
SSM6, 210
SSMB, 210
SSMO, 210
SSMR, 210
SSMRL, 210
SSMS, 210
SST-DT, 64
STARTS, 121
STC, 19
STH, 20

-T-

TDELAY, 180
TFK, 218
TFL, 21, 218
TFPOS1, 218
TFPOS2, 218
TOP, 164
TPOS-1, 180
TPOS-2, 180

-U-

UPC, 38, 157

-V-

VFSBB, 220
VFSBD, 220
VFSBT, 220
VFSBU, 220
V-RSR, 51

-W-

WCO-DT, 197, 221


WCOS, 221
WCOTYP, 221

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024


Otis Engineering Center Ring Car Board II With OCSS Otis Document 51395
Farmington Feature Setup Document Page 235 of 235

Unpublished Work - Ó Otis Elevator Company 2024

You might also like